2008 Pathfinder Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2008-pathfinder

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 448

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Compare the VIN (vehicle identification number) information found on your vehicle's VIN plate
to the VIN information below to determine which Owner's Manual applies to your vehicle. The
VIN plate is located on top of the instrument panel, on the driver's side of your vehicle.

If your vehicle's VIN is XXXXXXXXXXX633672 or lower:
Select Owner's Manual - A in the bookmarks panel on the left side of the screen.

If your vehicle's VIN is XXXXXXXXXXX633673 or higher:
Select Owner's Manual - B in the bookmarks panel on the left side of the screen.

FOREWORD

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity
with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or
taking other actions that could distract
you.
● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
children should be seated in the rear
seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive
models, a
mark is placed at the beginning of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for
off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel
drive models correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident. Be sure to read
“Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger
car because it has a higher center of
gravity for off-road use. As with other
vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or an accident.
Be sure to read “On-pavement and offroad driving precautions”, and “Avoiding collision and rollover”, and “Driving
safety precautions”, in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WHEN READING THE MANUAL
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety or durability, and
may
even
violate
governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design without notice and without obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTHt is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed to
Xanavi Informatics
Corporation.
Gracenotet is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc. The
Gracenote logo and
logo type, and the
“Powered by
Gracenote” logo are
trademarks of
Gracenote.
© 2007 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

– Your comments or questions
OR
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

2nd row seat belts (P. 1-12)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags
(if so equipped) (P. 1-40)
Front seat belts (P. 1-12)
Supplemental front impact air bags
(P.1-40)
Seats (P. 1-2)
Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P.1-47)
Seat belts with pretensioners (P. 1-54)
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags (if so equipped)
(P. 1-40)
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-22)

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WII0047

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Engine hood (P. 3-20)
Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-24)
Windshield (P. 8-20)
Power windows (P. 2-47)
Door locks, keyfob, keys, Intelligent Key
system (P. 3-4, 3-16, 3-2, 3-6)
Mirrors (P. 3-26)
Tire pressure (P. 9-11)
Flat tire (P. 6-2)
Tire chains (P. 8-40)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-27)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-30)
Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-14)

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WII0048

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Roof rack (P. 2-46)
Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)
Glass hatch (P. 3-21)
Rear window washer (P.2-25)
Intelligent Key system request button
(P. 3-6)
6. Glass hatch release (P.3-21)
7. Lift gate release switch (P. 3-21)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)
9. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-22, P. 9-3)
10. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-22)
11. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WII0124

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.

DVD entertainment system
(if so equipped) (P. 4-88)
2. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-50)
3. Map lights (P. 2-53)
4. Sun visors (P. 3-25)
5. HomeLinkT universal transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)
6. Glove box (P. 2-39)
7. Front seats (P. 1-2)
8. 2nd row seats (P.1-10)
9. 3rd row seats (P. 1-11)
10. Luggage storage (P. 2-42)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WII0050

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Ventilators (P. 4-35)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-27)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) (P. 4-85)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-40, P. 2-31)
Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-3, 2-12)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-18)
Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)
Navigation system* (if so equipped)
Navigation system* controls
(if so equipped)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-40)
Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-39)
Power outlet (P. 2-34)
Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-32)
Hill descent control switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)
Shift selector lever (P. 5-12)

LIC1223

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-33)
4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-21)
Storage
Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-49)
Climate controls (P. 4-36, 4-44)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-31)
Ignition switch (P. 5-8)
Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-24)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped)
Pedal position adjustment switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-24)
Outside mirror controls (P. 3-28)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ40DE engine

Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-23)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)
8. Drive belt location (P.8-17)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
11. Battery (P. 8-15)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WDI0633

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

VQ40DE

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

VK56DE engine

Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
6. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)
7. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)
8. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
10. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-23)
11. Battery (P. 8-15)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WDI0627

VK56DE

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light

2-13

Automatic transmission check warning
light (if so equipped)

2-13

Automatic transmission oil temperature
warning light

Warning
light

Name

Page

Warning
light

Name

Page

Door open warning
light

2-15

Shift P lock warning
light (if so equipped)

2-17

Engine oil pressure
warning light

2-15

Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-17

4WD warning light
(
model)

2-15

2-13

Intelligent Key system warning light (if
so equipped)

2-15

Automatic transmission park warning
light (
model)

2-13

Low fuel warning
light

2-16

Low tire pressure
warning light

2-16

Brake warning light

2-14

Low windshield
washer fluid warning
light

2-17

Seat belt warning
light and chime

2-17

Charge warning
light

2-14

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Automatic transmission position indicator light

2-18

Cruise main switch
indicator light

2-18

Cruise set switch
indicator light

2-18

4WD shift indicator
light (
model)

2-18

Front passenger air
bag status light

2-18

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Indicator
light

Name

Page

High beam indicator
light (Blue)

2-19

Hill descent control
indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-33

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

2-19

Overdrive off indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-20

Security indicator
light

2-20

Slip indicator light

2-20

Transfer 4LO position indicator light
model)
(

2-20

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights

2-21

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Vehicle dynamic
control off indicator
light

2-21

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—arosenma X

MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Front-Seat Active Head Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Child restraint installation using the seat
belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

SEATS
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this
section.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WRS0175

WRS0176

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.

WRS0131

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)
Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of
the seat cushion to the desired position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P
(Park).

WRS0163

FRONT POWER SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Operating tips
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.

Forward and backward
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.

Reclining

● Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.

Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”
in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for automatic drive positioner operation.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WRS0164

WRS0468

WRS0389

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat
cushion.

The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Move the lever up or down
to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Outboard seats

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Reclining
To recline the outboard seatbacks, pull up on the
lever and lean back.
To recline the center seat, pull up on the strap
located on the lower right-hand portion of the
seatback, and lean back.
The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat
back for occupants of different sizes for added
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit
(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

WARNING
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.

WRS0469

Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row
The outboard seating positions on the 2nd row
bench seat can be tipped forward for easy entry
or exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the
1 lift up on the latch located on the
3rd row s
upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row
bench seat and fold the seatback forward at an
angle over the seat base. This will release the
back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

LRS0331
2 lift up on the lower corner of the seat
Then s
base and tip the outboard seating position of the
2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd row
bench seat lift up on the same latch and fold the
seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up
on the seat base and tip it forward.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WRS0470

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,
push and hold the lock knob and push the head
restraint down.
The head restraints on the 2nd and 3rd row seats
are removable.

WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do
not remove them. Check the adjustment
after someone else uses the seat.

WRS0134

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears.

SPA1025

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
● Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section. Failure
to do so can reduce the effectiveness of
the Active Head Restraint.
● Active Head Restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

● Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair
Active Head Restraint function.

● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly.

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash type injuries.

● Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original positions.
Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as
described earlier in this section.

LRS0514

ARMREST
To use the center armrest on the 2nd row bench
seat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and
fold it down to the resting position.

FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seats when they are
in the fold-down position. In a collision,
people riding in these areas without
proper restraints are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.

● Head restraints should be adjusted
properly as they may provide significant
protection against injury in an accident.
Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any
reason.
● If the head restraints are removed for
any reason, they should be securely
stored to prevent them from causing
injury to passengers or damage to the
vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
accident.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

● Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.

LRS0608

Folding the front passenger’s seatback
(if so equipped)
To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for
extra storage length when transporting long
items:
1
s

Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Lift
up on the recline lever, located on the outside edge of the seat, and fold the seatback
forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the
latch located on the upper corner of the
seatback to release the back of the seat.

LRS0609

s
2

Once the seatback is released it will enable
you to fold the front passenger seatback flat
over the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a
seating position lift up on the seatback and
push it up to an upright position. Then pull up
on the recline lever and lean the seatback to
a proper seating position. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WARNING
● If you fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forward to carry longer objects, be sure this cargo is properly secured and not near an air bag. In a
crash, an inflating air bag might force
that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects away from the area in
which an air bag would inflate. See
“Precautions on supplemental restraint
system” later in this section.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the front passenger’s seat
when it is in the fold-down position. Use
of these areas by passengers could result in serious injury in an accident or
sudden stop.

WRS0472

Folding the 2nd row bench seat
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum
cargo hauling:
1
s

Lower the head restraints to the full “down”
position. Pull the strap forward, located in
the center of each seat cushion, and fold
each seat cushion toward the front of the
vehicle.

LRS0494

s
2

Then lift up on the recline lever on the side of
the outboard seats to fold the outboard seatbacks flat. To fold the center seatback flat,
pull up on the strap on the edge of the center
seat cushion and fold the seatback toward
the front of the vehicle.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

LRS0658

s
3

There is a carpet panel flap on the back of
each seat that can be folded toward the
back of the vehicle

WRS0471

s
4

The carpet panel flap provides a level cargo
floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded
flat.

5. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seats
to a seating position reverse the process for
the outboard seats.
6. To return the center seat to a seating position, lift up on the pull strap on the back of
the seat base while lifting on the seatback.
Then push the seat cushion back into place.
Make sure to properly raise the seatback to an upright position and push
the seat cushion down into place.

LRS0653

Folding the 3rd row seats
To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo
capacity:
1. Make sure that the head restraints are lowered.
2. Stow the third row seat belts in the seat belt
hooks found on the sides of the cargo area.
See “Seat belt hook” later in this section.
3. Pull up on the latch located in the upper
corner of each seatback and lower the seatback forward over the seat base.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

SEAT BELTS
To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position
use the pull straps to raise each seatback. Pull
back until the seatbacks latch into position.
Make sure to properly raise each seatback
to an upright and secured position.

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

SSS0134

WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.

SSS0016

WARNING
● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.

SSS0014

WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.

● If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
● Once the pretensioner has activated, it
cannot be reused and must be replaced
together with the retractor. See your
NISSAN dealer.
● Removal and installation of the pretensioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
● Rear facing child restraint
● Front facing child restraint
● Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear
facing child restraints. Front facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow
rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year
old. Booster seats are used to help position a
vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

for infants and small children. See “Child Restraints” later in this section.
Also, there are other types of child restraints
available for larger children for additional protection.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) for the front passenger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.

Infants

Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints

Children that are over one year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

Small Children

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a child
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.

Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches
(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18
kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be
used to obtain proper seat belt fit.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits close to
the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat
belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat
should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
properly positioned across the top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the
hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating
positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child
has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or
near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt
without the booster seat.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
areas while the vehicle is moving. The
child could be seriously injured or killed in
an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,
and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the
shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your
chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your
abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.

WRS0174

Manual front seat shown

Fastening the seat belts
1
s

Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

Once retracted, the seat belt is in the Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR) mode. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more information.
The ALR should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt
use by a passenger, the locking mode
should not be activated. If it is activated it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
WRS0137
2
s

Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock during
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion permits the seat belt to
move, and allows you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.

WRS0138
3
s

Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.

4
s

Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have a locking
mechanism for child restraint installation. It is
referred to as the Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode or child restraint mode.
When the ALR is activated the seat belt cannot
be extended again until the seat belt tongue is
detached from the buckle and fully retracted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows.
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

LRS0242

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
1
s

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

Front and 2nd row outboard seats

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
and 2nd row outboard seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
1 the adjustment button and
To adjust, pull out s
2 to the desired
move the shoulder belt anchor s
position, so the belt passes over the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be away from your face
and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder
belt anchor into position.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.

● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.

● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.

LRS0515

Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when folding
down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on
the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender is available which is
compatible with the installed seat belts. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of
length and may be used for either the driver or
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN
dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

CHILD RESTRAINTS
● Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS

WRS0256

WARNING
● Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while riding in the vehicle.
Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death.
● Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be used
in the rear seat.
● NISSAN recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat. If
you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see “Child restraint installation using the seat belts”
later in this section.
● Improper use or improper installation
of a child restraint can increase the risk
or severity of injury for both the child
and other occupants of the vehicle and
can lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.
● Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select one which will
fit your child and vehicle. It may not be
possible to properly install some types
of child restraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop
greatly increases.
● Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.
● Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as
upright as possible.
● After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the seat
near the LATCH attachment or by the
seat belt path. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm). If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.

● When your child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH System
or a seat belt to prevent it from being
thrown around in case of a sudden stop
or accident.

CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the child
restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System
or LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigid
or webbing-mounted attachments that can be
connected to these lower anchors. For details,
see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH)” later in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See
“Child restraint installation using the seat belts”
later in this section. In general, child restraints are
also designed to be installed with the lap portion
of a lap/shoulder seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and small children of various sizes. When
selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
● If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.

WRS0804

LATCH system anchor locations

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the 2nd row outboard seating
positions only. Do not attempt to install a child
restraint in the center position using the LATCH
anchors.

WRS0805

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

LATCH lower anchor point locations
The LATCH system anchors are located at the
rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A
label is attached to the seatback to help you
locate the LATCH system anchors.

WARNING
● Attach LATCH system compatible child
restraints only at the locations shown. If
a child restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WRS0700

LRS0661

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

● The LATCH system anchors are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstance are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.

Installing child restraint LATCH anchor
attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LATCH child restraints generally require the use
of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child
restraint” later in this section for installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint. See “Child
restraint installation using LATCH” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires
the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to
the anchor point.

If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint on the rear
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

WARNING
● Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.
● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
the cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.

Top Tether Anchor Point Locations
Anchor points are located in the following locations:
● 2nd row bench on the floor behind the outboard seating positions as shown.
● 2nd row bench center seatback as shown.

LRS0659

2nd row bench seat

Installing top tether strap
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt
or the LATCH system (rear outboard seat positions only), as applicable.
1. Top tether strap
2. Anchor point
For the 2nd row bench seat, install the top tether
strap as follows:
1. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the head restraint with the head restraint in
the full “down” position.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the seat directly behind the child
restaint.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint
installation instructions in this section and the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING LATCH
WARNING
● Attach LATCH compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. For
the LATCH lower anchor locations, see
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH)” in this section. If
a child restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident.
● The LATCH anchors are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstance are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses.

● Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
your fingers into the lower anchor area
and feeling to make sure there are no
obstructions over the LATCH anchors,
such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the LATCH anchors are obstructed.

Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row seats using LATCH:
1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is adjustable to assist in attaching the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0799

Front facing web-mounted – step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
4. Return the seatback to its normal upright
and locked position.
The back of the child restraint should be secured
against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust
or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to
install the head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WRS0800

Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
Check to make sure it is not contacting front
seats and preventing it from being properly secured. If you are unable to properly secure the
child restraint, move it to another seating position
or try a different child restraint.

LRS0671

Front facing – step 5
5. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in
this section.

WRS0697

Front facing – step 7
7. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
hold the child restraint near the LATCH attachment and use force to push the child
restraint from side to side, and tug it forward
to make sure that it is securely held in place.
It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If
it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull
again on the anchor attachments to further
tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to
properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

8. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4
through 7.

Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row seats using LATCH:
1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is adjustable to assist in attaching the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0801

Rear facing web-mounted – step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
4. Return the seatback to its normal upright
and locked position.
Check to make sure it is not contacting front
seats and preventing it from being properly secured. If you are unable to properly secure the
child restraint, move it to another seating position
or try a different child restraint.

WRS0802

Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3
5. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

LRS0673

Rear facing – step 5
6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
hold the child restraint near the LATCH attachment and use force to push the child
restraint from side to side, and tug it forward
to make sure that it is securely held in place.
It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If
it does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull
again on the anchor attachments to further
tighten the child restraint. If you are unable to
properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to another seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

LRS0674

Rear facing – step 6
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 6.

WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Supplemental front air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing
child restraint could be struck by the
supplemental front air bag in a crash
and could seriously injure or kill your
child.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

● NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a forward
facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat
to the rearmost position. Also, be sure
the front passenger air bag status light
is illuminated to indicate the passenger
air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this section for details.
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
● Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status”
later in this section.
● A child restraint with a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat.

The instructions in this section apply to child
restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seat or the front passenger seat.

WRS0699

Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1

Front-facing
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear
seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions
The back of the child restraint should be secured
against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust
or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” in this section.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint
when the child restraint is removed. If the seating
position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child
restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.
When installing a child restraint in the 2nd or 3rd
row, check to make sure that it is not contacting
the seat directly in front of it. If you are unable to
properly secure the child restraint, move it to
another seating position or try a different child
restraint.

WRS0680

Front facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

LRS0667

Front facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode
(child restraint mode). It reverts to emergency locking retractor mode when the seat
belt is fully retracted.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

LRS0668

Front facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0681

Front facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.

WRS0698

Front facing – step 7
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Top tether strap child restraint” in
this section. Do not install child restraints
that require the use of a top tether strap to
seating positions that do not have a top
tether anchor.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
hold the child restraint near the seat belt
path and use force to push the child restraint
from side to side, and tug it forward to make
sure that it is securely held in place. It should
not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly secure
the restraint, move the restraint to another
seating position and try again, or try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in
all types of vehicles.
9. Check that the retractor is in the Automatic
Locking Retractor mode by trying to pull
more seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the
retractor, the retractor is in the Automatic
Locking Retractor mode.
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 8.

WRS0475

Front facing – step 11
11. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated see 9Front passenger
air bag and status light9 in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the Automatic Locking Retractor mode child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1

Rear-facing
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

When installing a child restraint in the 2nd or 3rd
row, check to make sure that it is not contacting
the seat directly in front of it. If you are unable to
properly secure the child restraint, move it to
another seating position or try a different child
restraint.

WRS0682

Rear facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

LRS0669

Rear facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode
(child restraint mode). It reverts to emergency locking retractor mode when the seat
belt is fully retracted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

LRS0670

Rear facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0683

Rear facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the child
restraint; press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

WRS0684

Rear facing – step 6
6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
hold the child restraint near the seat belt
path and use force to push the child restraint
from side to side, and tug it forward to make
sure that it is securely held in place. It should
not move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the child
restraint. If you are unable to properly secure
the restraint, move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again, or try a
different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

BOOSTER SEATS
7. Check that the retractor is in the Automatic
Locking Retractor mode by trying to pull
more seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out
of the retractor, the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode

● Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the Automatic Locking Retractor mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER
SEATS
WARNING
● Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while riding in the vehicle.
Failure to use a child restraint or
booster seat can result in serious injury
or death.

● NISSAN recommends that the booster
seat be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat. If
you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, see “Booster seat installation” in this section.
● A booster seat must only be installed in
a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a
three-point type seat belt with a
booster seat can result in a serious injury in sudden stop or collision.
● Improper use or improper installation
of a booster seat can increase the risk
or severity of injury for both the child
and other occupants of the vehicle and
can lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

● Do not use towels, books, pillows or
other items in place of a booster seat.
Items such as these may move during
normal driving or a collision and result
in serious injury or death. Booster seats
are designed to be used with a
lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are designed to properly route the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt over
the strongest portions of a child’s body
to provide the maximum protection during a collision.
● Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a booster seat,
be sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible
to properly install some types of
booster seats in your vehicle.
● If the booster seat and seat belt is not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision or a sudden stop
greatly increases.

● After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt, make
sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
away from the child’s face and neck and
the lap portion of the belt does not
cross the abdomen.
● Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
child or under the child’s arm. If you
must install a booster seat in the front
seat, see “Booster seat installation”
later in this section.
● When your booster seat is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in
case of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION
Remember that a booster seat left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the booster
seat.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the booster seat, but as
upright as possible.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
● Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
WARNING
NISSAN recommends that booster seats
be installed in the rear seat. However, if
you must install a booster seat in the front
passenger seat, move the passenger’s
seat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION

LRS0453

LRS0464

● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seat back must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1 is chosen, the
low back booster seat s
vehicle seat back must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seat back is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2 should be used.
high back booster seat s

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt automatic locking retractor mode when using
a booster seat with the seat belts.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.

● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with your
child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

LRS0504

WRS0699

1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.

Rear center position

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0502

Rear outboard position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to
obtain the correct booster seat fit. See
“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.

LRS0454

Front passenger position
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.

WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light
may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning
the driver and passenger supplemental front air
bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System), front
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bags, roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags and pretensioner seat
belts.
Supplemental front impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system (if so equipped): This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
chest area of the driver and front passenger in
certain side impact collisions. The supplemental
side air bag is designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted.

side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact,
the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the
side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover
both curtain air bags are designed to inflate and
remain inflated for a short time.
These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the seat belts and are not a substitute
for them. Seat belts should always be correctly
worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument
panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier
in this section for instructions and precautions on
seat belt usage.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (if so
equipped): This system can help cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in front
and rear outboard seating positions in certain

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
advanced air bag system monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
WRS0031

WARNING
● The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
side impact, rear impact, rollover, or
lower severity frontal collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.

● The seat belts and the supplemental
front air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat. The front air bags inflate with
great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the supplemental
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against

● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front Passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the
supplemental front air bag inflates.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

ARS1133

ARS1041

WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

ARS1042

ARS1043

ARS1044

WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags or curtain sideimpact and rollover air bags inflate if
they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly
restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

ARS1045

WRS0431

WRS0256

WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supplemental front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. See
“Child restraints” earlier in this section
for details.

Do not lean against doors or windows.

WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags (if so equipped) and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags (if so equipped):
● The supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower
severity side collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WARNING

WRS0365

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162

Do not lean against doors or windows.

● The seat belts, the front seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bags and
roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags are most
effective when you are sitting well back
and upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side air
bag on the side of the seatback of the
front seat or near the side roof rails. Do
not allow anyone sitting in the front
seats or rear outboard seats to extend
their hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

WRS0363

SSS0159

WARNING
● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
supplemental side air bag inflation.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag modules
(if so equipped)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags (if so
equipped)
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Supplemental front air bag modules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Occupant classification system control
unit
7. Occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor)
8. Satellite sensors
9. Seat belt buckle switches
10. Pretensioner retractor
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules (if so
equipped)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
WRS0474

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front air bag is located in
the center of the steering wheel. The passenger
supplemental front air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The supplemental front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper supplemental front air bag
system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage inflators. It also monitors information from
the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it
additionally monitors the weight of an occupant
or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based
on information from the sensors, only one front air
bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the
crash severity and whether the front occupants
are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front
passenger air bag may be automatically turned

OFF under some conditions, depending on the
weight detected on the passenger seat and how
the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag
is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be
illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will
not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section for further details. One front air bag
inflating does not indicate improper performance
of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a
fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the
release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and
does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to
not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.

facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order
to help protect the front occupants. Because of
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, the front air bag module
during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The supplemental front air bags operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of
seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants. They
can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, an inflating front air bag may cause

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

Status light
is
The front passenger air bag status light
located near the climate controls. The light operates as follows:
● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
is
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
illuminates to indicate
section: The
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
WRS0475

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meet the conditions outlined in this section: The light
is OFF to indicate that
the front passenger air bag is operational.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
to meet the requirements.
One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors
described later. For example, if a child is in the
front passenger seat, the advanced air bag system is designed to turn the passenger air bag
OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a
child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the child’s
weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor operation can vary depending on the front passenger
seat belt sensors.
The front passenger seat belt sensors are designed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode
(child restraint mode). Based on the weight on
the seat detected by the occupant classification
sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat
belt, the Advanced Air Bag System determines
whether the front passenger air bag should be
automatically turned OFF as required by the
regulations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant
improperly uses the seat belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor mode (child restraint mode),
this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat
belt properly for the most effective protection by
the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
designed to operate as described above to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to
use the Automatic Locking Retractor mode (child
restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a

crash instead of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for proper use and
installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that

the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light
, located in the meter and gauges area

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Other supplemental front air bag precautions

WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental front air bag inflates.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the supplemental front air bag system.
● Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and the
instrument panel assembly by placing
material over the steering wheel pad
and above the instrument panel or by
installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal injury.
● Work on and around the supplemental
front air bag system should be done by
a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a
NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not
be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used on
the air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
● The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow
and
orange
for
easy
identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the supplemental front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

manual still apply and must be followed.
The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air bags are
designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to those of a
higher severity side impact. They are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
They may not inflate in certain side collisions. As
a result, certain vehicle movements (for example,
during severe off roading) may cause the airbags
to inflate.
WRS0381

Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags (if so equipped)
and roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag (if so
equipped) system
The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags are located in the side roof rails in all 3 rows.
These systems are designed to meet voluntary
guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to
out-of-position occupants. However, all of the
information, cautions and warnings in this

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for
example, during severe off roading) may cause
the airbags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper supplemental side air bag
and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag operation.
When the front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to
cushion the impact force on the chest of the front
occupants. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in
the front and rear outboard seating positions in all
rows. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag, or
curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other
injuries. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the supplemental side air
bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as
far away as practical from the door finishers and
side roof rails. The front seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the
occupants. Because of this, the force of the front
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags
and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags inflating can increase

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or
is against, these air bag modules during inflation.
The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags will deflate quickly after the collision is
over.
The front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air bags will
remain inflated for a short time.
The front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if the supplemental side air
bag inflates.
● Right after inflation, several front seatmounted side-impact supplemental air
bag and curtain side-impact and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them;
you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of the
front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags or damage
to the front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental curtain air bag system.
● Tampering with the front seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bags may
result in serious personal injury. For
example, do not change the front seats
by placing material near the seatbacks
or by installing additional trim material,
such as seat covers, around the front
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/22/07—debbie X

● Work around and on the roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags should be done
by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by
a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the front seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bags or
roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are
yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the supplemental side air
bag and curtain air bag system and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Front
seats)
WARNING
● The seat belts with pretensioners cannot be reused after activation. It must
be replaced together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but the pretensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belts with pretensioners. This
is to prevent accidental activation of
the seat belts with pretensioners or
damage to the seat belts with pretensioners operation. Tampering with the
seat belts with pretensioners may result
in serious personal injury.

● Work around and on the seat belts with
pretensioners should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical
equipment should also be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the seat belts
with pretensioners.
● If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct pretensioner
disposal procedures are set forth in the
appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.
Incorrect disposal procedures could
cause personal injury.
The front seat belts with pretensioners activates
in conjunction with the front supplemental air bag
systems. Working with the seat belt retractor, it
helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions,
helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt’s
retractor. These seat belts are used the same as
conventional seat belts.
When the pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.

Warning labels about the supplemental front air
bags, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air bag systems
are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

After the pretensioners have activated, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if
necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioners, the
supplemental air bag warning light
will not
come on, will flash intermittently or will turn on for
7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key
has been turned to the ON or START position. In
this case, the pretensioner may not function
properly. They must be checked and repaired.
Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the seat belts with pretensioners and guide the buyer to the appropriate
sections in this Owner’s Manual.

LRS0397

1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor.
2. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags warning label (if so
equipped)
The warning label is located on the side of
the passenger’s side center pillar.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

When the ignition key is in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
supplemental front air bag, front seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bags, roofmounted curtain side-impact, rollover supplemental air bag and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag and seat belts with
pretensioners systems. The circuits monitored by
the supplemental air bag warning light are the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, rollover sensor, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag modules, pretensioner and all related wiring.

● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the supplemental front
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags, roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. It
must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle
to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, front seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bags, roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag and/or seat belt
with pretensioners will not operate in an
accident. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure
The supplemental front air bags, front seatmounted side-impact supplemental air bags,
roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a
reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental
air bag warning light remains illuminated after
inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of
these supplemental air bag systems should be
done only by a NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, front seatmounted side-impact supplemental air bags,
roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag, pretensioners and related
parts should be pointed out to the person per-

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

forming the maintenance. The ignition key should
always be in the LOCK position when working
under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
● Once a supplemental front air bag, front
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags, roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air
bag has inflated, the air bag module will
not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the
supplemental front air bags inflate, the
activated seat belts with pretensioners
must also be replaced. The air bag module and seat belts with pretensioners
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and seat belts with
pretensioners cannot be repaired.

● If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag, seat belts with pretensioners or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental
air bag and seat belts with pretensioners disposal procedures are set forth in
the appropriate NISSAN Service
Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

● The supplemental front air bag, roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems, and
the seat belts with pretensioners
should be inspected by a NISSAN
dealer if there is any damage to the
front end or side portion of the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-12
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-29
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Storage bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2nd row under-seat storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Seat pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Cargo area storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
HomeLinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-53
Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Programming HomeLinkT for Canadian
customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Operating the HomeLinkT universal
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-56
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

LIC1223

2-2 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

METERS AND GAUGES
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
WIC1040

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Warning/indicator lights
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Voltmeter

6.
7.
8.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip computer (if so equipped)
Engine oil pressure gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge

Instruments and controls 2-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

LIC0780

WIC0912

1.
2.
3.

Speedometer
Odometer
Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer

With twin trip odometer
Changing the display:
For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer,
pushing the change button changes the display
as follows:
Trip

→ Trip

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

2-4 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the change button for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
The display of the trip computer is situated in the
speedometer display. When the ignition is turned
to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the trip
computer and then shows the mode chosen before the ignition switch was turned OFF.

LIC0781

With trip computer
For vehicles equipped with trip computer, pushing the change button changes the display as
follows:
Trip
→ Trip
→ Distance to Empty →
Average speed → Average fuel consumption →
Journey time → Trip
For additional information, refer to “Trip computer” later in this section.
For vehicles equipped with navigation system,
refer to “How to use the INFO button” in the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio
systems” section later in this manual.

When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes
of the trip computer can be selected by pushing
the trip computer change button. The following
modes can be selected:

Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the
fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning
feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is
automatically selected and the digits blink in order to draw the driver’s attention. Press the
change button if you wish to return to the mode

that was selected before the warning occurred.
The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the
vehicle is refueled.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
display will change to (----).
NOTE:
● If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is
turned OFF may continue to be displayed.
● When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.

Average speed (MPH or km/h)
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done
by pressing the change button for more than
approximately 1 second. The display is updated
every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a
reset, the display shows (----).

Average fuel consumption (Mpg or
l/100km)
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
Resetting is done by pressing the change button

Instruments and controls 2-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the
first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display
shows (----).

Journey time
The journey time mode shows the time since the
last reset. The displayed time can be reset by
pressing the change button for more than approximately 1 second.

Trip computer reset
Pushing the change button for more than 3 seconds will reset all modes except Trip A and distance to empty (dte).

LIC0738

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine
1 .
into the red zone s

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.

LIC0739

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the
1 when the gauge needle points
normal range s
within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.

2-6 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

indicates that the fuel-filler door is
The
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.

CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
malfunction indicator light
the
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After a few driving trips,
the
light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
LIC0740

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.

● For additional information, see “Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” later in
this section.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition key is turned to OFF.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers E (Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● If the gauge needle does not move with
the proper amount of engine oil, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in
such a condition could cause serious
damage to the engine.

LIC0741

WIC1299

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

VOLTMETER

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication system oil pressure while the engine is running. The
needle should be in the middle of the gauge when
the engine is running.

When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.
When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage.

CAUTION
● This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.)

While cranking the engine, the volts drop below
the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal
1 while the engine is
range (11 – 15 volts) s
running, it may indicate that the charging system
is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.

2-8 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates heading direction of vehicle.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the
or
button as described in the
charts below to activate various features of the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
Type A
Feature:
Push and hold
(Push button again for about 1 secthe
button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second

Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds

Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
toggles on/off

11 seconds

Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings

13 seconds

Compass enters calibration mode

Type B
Feature:
Push and hold
(Push button again for about 1 secthe
button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second

Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds

Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings

10 seconds

Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
WIC0904

Type A

COMPASS DISPLAY
Push the
or
button for about 1 second when the ignition key is in the ON position to
toggle the outside temperature and compass
1 on or off. The display will
direction display s
indicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

Instruments and controls 2-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LIC0583

Type B
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.

WIC0355

2-10 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the
button for about
11 seconds or the
button for about 8
seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the
or the
button repeatedly to toggle through the zone numbers
until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.

Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the
button for about 13 seconds or
the
for about 10 seconds. The “C”
icon in the compass display will illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
or

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light

Low fuel warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic transmission check warning light (if
so equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light

High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission oil temperature warning light

Low windshield washer fluid warning light

Hill descent control indicator light (if so
equipped)

Automatic transmission park warning light
(
model)

Seat belt warning light and chime

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Shift P warning light (if so equipped)

Overdrive off indicator light (if so equipped)

Charge warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Security indicator light

Door open warning light

Automatic transmission position indicator light

Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Cruise main switch indicator light

Transfer 4LO position indicator light
model)
(

4WD warning light (

Cruise set switch indicator light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Brake warning light

model)

Intelligent Key system warning light (if so
equipped)

4WD shift indicator light (

model)

Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light

2-12 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and turn the ignition key to the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
,

The following lights come on briefly and then go
off:
,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS
or

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the
ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
9Brake system9 in the 9Starting and driving9 section.

Automatic transmission check
warning light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light
comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes
on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic
transmission system is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Automatic transmission oil
temperature warning light
This light comes on when the automatic transmission oil temperature is too high. If the light comes
on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as
soon as safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation when the A/T
oil temperature warning light is on may
damage the automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission park
model)
warning light (
WARNING
● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that
the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and the transfer
case is in neutral.
● When parking, always make sure that
the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates
and the parking brake is set. Failure to
engage the transfer position in 2WD,
AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in the
vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting
in serious personal injury or property
damage.
● Part time 4WD: Shift the 4WD switch
into the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again
to turn off the ATP warning light when
the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P position and the ATP
warning light is ON. (Before shifting the
4WD switch into the 4LO position, move
the automatic transmission selector lever into the N position once, shift the
selector lever into P again and make
sure the ATP warning light is OFF.)

Instruments and controls 2-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—arosenma X

● All mode 4WD: The warning light may
come on when the ignition switch is ON
and the automatic transmission lever is
shifted to the P position while shifting
the transfer case between 4H and 4LO.
Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD,
AUTO, 4H, or 4LO position again to turn
off the ATP warning light when the
warning light comes on. (Before shifting the 4WD switch into the 4LO position or out of 4LO in the 4H position,
move the automatic transmission selector lever into the N position.) Shift
the selector lever into the P position
and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is ON and the ATP warning
light is OFF.)
This light indicates that the automatic transmission parking function is not engaged. If the transfer control is not secured in any drive position
while the automatic transmission selector lever is
in the P (Park) position, the transmission will
disengage and the drive wheels will not lock.

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

Low brake fluid warning light

● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the
light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light
comes on while the engine is running with the
parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and
perform the following:

● If the brake fluid
MINIMUM or MIN
fluid reservoir, do
brake system has
NISSAN dealer.

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the
light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

WARNING
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.

level is below the
mark on the brake
not drive until the
been checked at a

Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.

CAUTION
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely. Refer to “Variable
voltage control system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section later
in this manual.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—arosenma X

● Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors are not
closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON
position.

Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.

4WD warning light
model)
(
The 4WD warning light comes on when the key
switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the
engine is started.

– in the 4LO position for part time 4WD
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
the transmission selector lever to the
N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,
the warning light will either remain illuminated or
blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting
and driving” section.

● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.

CAUTION
● If the warning light comes on or blinks
during operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD
warning light turns on when you are
driving on dry hard surface roads:
– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the
4WD shift switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
the transmission selector lever to the
N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.

Intelligent Key system warning
light (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key system warning light illuminates green when the ignition switch can be
turned. The Intelligent Key system warning light
illuminates red when the ignition switch cannot
be turned.
The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks
red if the Intelligent Key is taken outside of the
vehicle while the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
● If the Intelligent Key system warning light
blinks, make sure of the location of the Intelligent Key as soon as possible. The Intelligent Key should be carried by the driver
while operating the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—arosenma X

● The Intelligent Key system warning light
turns off about 10 seconds after the Intelligent Key is brought inside the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key system warning light blinks
green indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is
almost discharged.
See “Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.

Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle
reaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. If you select
the tire pressure information (if so equipped) in
the display, the LOW PRESSURE warning message will be displayed. The tire pressure for each
tire will also be displayed.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure is
adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at
speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning
light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure.

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section.

WARNING
● If the light does illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON position, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.

For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and in the “In case of emergency”
section.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

2-16 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light OFF.
If the light still comes on while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluid
warning light
This light comes on when the windshield washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid
as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition key is turned to the ON or START position
and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt

is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds
for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.

Shift P warning light (if so
equipped)
This light blinks red and the key reminder chime
sounds if the shift selector lever is in any position
other than P (Park) and the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. Return the shift selector lever
to P (Park) with the ignition switch in the OFF
position and the light will turn off. Place the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
chime will turn off.

Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition key is in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light

Instruments and controls 2-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
supplemental front air bags, front seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bags (if so
equipped), roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags (if so
equipped) and seat belt with pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be
taken to a NISSAN dealer:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the seat
belts with pretensioner systems may not function
properly. For additional details see “Supplemental restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
of this manual.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, front seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bags (if so
equipped), roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air bags
(if so equipped) and/or seat belts with
pretensioner systems will not operate in
an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked
by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic transmission
position indicator light
When the ignition key is turned to the ON position, this indicator light shows the automatic
transmission selector lever position. See “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicator
light
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator
light
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

4WD shift indicator light
model)
(
The light should turn off within 1 second after
turning the ignition switch to ON.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator light will illuminate the position selected by
the 4WD shift switch.
The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
while shifting from one drive mode to the
other.

Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light (
)
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
is being used.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light
(blue)

For additional information, see “Hill descent control switch” later in this section and “Hill descent
control system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Malfunction indicator light
(MIL)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.

The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on
steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,
and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4
liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

Hill descent control system on
indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned ON, this light
comes on briefly and then turns off.
The light comes on when the hill descent control
system is activated.
If the hill descent control switch is on and the
indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.
If the indicator light does not come on or blink
when the hill descent switch is on, the system
may not be functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.

Operation
The malfunction indicator light will come on in
one of two ways:
● Malfunction indicator light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to drive the
light should turn off after
vehicle. The
a few driving trips. If the
light does not
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed to
the dealer.
● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission control system.

Overdrive off indicator light
(A/T model) (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the overdrive function
is OFF.
The automatic transmission overdrive function is
controlled by the overdrive switch.
For additional information, see “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Security indicator light
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function
indicates the security system equipped on the
vehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security systems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light
This indicator light will blink when the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if the slip indicator
blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving
accordingly.
The slip indicator light also comes on when you
turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is
operational. If the light does not come on or does
not go off, have the traction control system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If the battery is removed or discharged, the traction control system is disabled and the slip indicator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
To reset the system, you must perform the reset
procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
If the light does not go off after performing the
reset procedure, have the traction control system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Transfer 4LO position
indicator light (
model)
The light should turn off within 1 second after
turning the ignition switch to ON.
This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is
set in the 4LO position with the ignition key in the
ON position.
The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the
switch while driving.
Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator
light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch
to 4LO.
The indicator light may blink while shifting
from one drive mode to the other.
All mode 4WD (if so equipped)
If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position
and the light blinks, stop the vehicle, drive slowly
forward and the light will turn on.
When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the
vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever
to the N position with the brake pedal depressed,
then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to
4LO or 4H.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch
between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle
and shift the transmission selector lever to the N
position with the brake pedal depressed.
Part time 4WD (if so equipped)
The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and
remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the
transmission into gear. If the transmission selector lever is shifted from the N position to any other
gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the
vehicle may move unexpectedly.
When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the
vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever
to the N position with the brake pedal depressed,
then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to
4LO or 4H.
You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch
between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle
and shift the transmission selector lever to the N
position with the brake pedal depressed.

Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.

Vehicle dynamic control off
indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the vehicle
dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF, the
transfer case is in the 4LO position (
model), or when the vehicle dynamic control system is not functioning properly. This indicates the
vehicle dynamic control system is not operating.
Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again
or restart the engine and the system will operate
normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)
system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on
when you turn the ignition key to the ON position.
The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
system is operational. If the light stays on or
comes on along with the SLIP indicator light
while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamic
control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If the battery is removed or discharged, the vehicle dynamic control system is disabled and the
VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. To reset the system, you must perform
the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic
control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing the
reset procedure, have the traction control system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
While the vehicle dynamic control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the
system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while
the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key
and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a
chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if
the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SECURITY SYSTEMS
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.

WIC0841

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:
● Vehicle security system
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a

How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows and the glass hatch. (The
system can be armed even if the windows are open. However, the glass
hatch must be closed.)
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key.

● any request switch (Intelligent Key models).
● the keyfob or Intelligent Key.
Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:
button. All doors lock.
● Push the
The hazard lights flash twice and the horn
beeps once to indicate all doors are
locked.
button is pushed with
● When the
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked.
The horn may or may not beep. Refer to
“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the Predriving checks and adjustments” section or
“Comfort & Convenience settings” in the
“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems” section.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with:
● the power door lock switch (if the door is
opened, locked and then closed).
● the key — master or mechanical (Intelligent Key models).

2-22 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

4. Confirm that the
indicator light comes
light stays on for about 30
on. The
seconds. The vehicle security system is now
pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts
into the armed phase. The
light begins
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s
door is unlocked by the key, a request
switch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if the
ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the
system will not arm.
● If the key is turned slowly when locking
the driver’s door, the system may not
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
beyond the vertical position toward the
unlock position to remove the key, the
system may be disarmed when the key
is removed. If the indicator light fails to
glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door
once and lock it again.
● Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
arm with all doors closed and locked
with the ignition key in the OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
● The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
the driver’s door with the key, a request
switch or by pressing the
button on
the keyfob or Intelligent Key.
The alarm is activated by:

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.

● opening a door without using the key or
keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using
the inside lock knob or the power door lock
switch).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

● opening the glass hatch without unlocking
the lift gate.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door with the key, pressing the
button on
the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all
doors with any request switch (Intelligent Key
models).

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

LIC0474

WIC0843

Security indicator light

SWITCH OPERATION

The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition key is in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
1
s

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
A (Slower) or s
B (Faster). Also, the inters
mittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

2-24 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
NOTE:

CAUTION

You can turn on or turn off the driving
speed dependent intermittent wiper function for vehicles with navigation system.
Refer to “Comfort & Convenience settings”
in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section later in
this manual.
2
s
3
s

Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

4 to have one sweep operaPush the lever up s
tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
5

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.

● Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

WIC0844

The rear window wiper and washer operate when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position
to operate the wiper.
1
s

Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation
(not adjustable)

2
s

ON – continuous low speed operation

3 to operate the
Push the switch forward s
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the window and obscure your vision. Warm the rear window
with the defroster before you wash the
rear window.

CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

LIC0782

Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light comes on.
Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

LIC1173

Type B

The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

LIC0560

Type A

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
s

When turning the switch to the
position, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.

2
s

When turning the switch to the
position, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.

LIC0687

Type B

LIC0688

Type C

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi1 .
tion s
2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a
door is opened and left open, the headlights
remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is
opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute
timer is reset.
LIC0561

Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
the OFF,
, or
position.

LIC0835

Be sure you do not put anything on top of
1 located on the top
the autolight sensor s
side of the instrument panel. The autolight
sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is
dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
If this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the key in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you turn the key to OFF and all doors are
closed.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

After the headlights automatically turn off with the
or
position,
headlight switch in the
the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if
the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position
and then turned to the
or
position.

CAUTION

WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.

Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
LIC0562

Headlight beam select
1
s

To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
light illuminates.
and the

2
s
3
s

Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the
headlight switch is in the
or
position, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
position. Turn the
OFF position or in the
headlight switch to the
position for full
illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is turned off.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WIC0917

LIC0563

LIC0393

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

The instrument brightness control operates when
the
headlight
control
switch
is
in
the
,
or AUTO position (with autolights activated).

Turn signal
1
s

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the
position, then turn the fog light
switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.

A to adjust the brightness of
Turn the control s
instrument panel lights when driving at night.

Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal
2
s

To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH

HORN
● Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

LIC0394

LIC0604

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

To sound the horn, push the area near the horn
icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so
equipped)

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering
wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.
NOTE:
The heated steering wheel switch is
equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the
switch has been activated for 30 minutes,
the system will automatically turn off. If the
surface temperature of the steering wheel
is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is
turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC0421

LIC1041

The heated steering wheel system is designed to
operate only when the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is below approximately 68°F
(20°C).

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if
so equipped).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The
indicator light will come on.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
desired, depending on the temperature. The
indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is
below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the
steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C).

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is
on.

1. Start the engine.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.

2-32 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if
so equipped)

CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
● If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.

WIC0534

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The
indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine
to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dynamic control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.

LIC0743

WARNING
● Never rely solely on the hill descent
control system to control vehicle speed
when driving on steep downhill grades.
Always drive carefully when using the
hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing
the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen,
muddy or extremely steep downhill
roads. Failure to control vehicle speed
may result in a loss of control of the
vehicle and possible serious injury or
death.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

POWER OUTLET
● The hill descent control may not control
the vehicle speed on a hill under all load
or road conditions. Always be prepared
to depress the brake pedal to control
vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal
injury.

CAUTION
When the hill descent control system operates continuously for a long time, the
temperature of the brake pads may increase and the hill descent control system
may be temporarily disabled (the indicator
light will blink). If the indicator light does
not come on continuously after blinking,
stop using the system.
The hill descent control system is designed to
reduce driver workload when going down steep
hills. The hill descent control system helps to
control vehicle speed so the driver can concentrate on steering the vehicle.
To activate the hill descent control system:
● the automatic transmission selector lever
must be in forward or reverse gear,
● the 4WD switch must be in the 4L position
and the vehicle speed must be under 15
mph (25 km/h) or

● the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position
and the vehicle speed must be under 21
mph (35 km/h), and
● the hill descent control system switch must
be ON.
The hill descent control indicator light will come
on when the system is activated. Also, the
stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent
control system applies the brakes to control vehicle speed.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed
while the hill descent control system is on, the
system will stop operating temporarily. As soon
as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the
hill descent control system begins to function
again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
The hill descent control indicator light blinks if the
switch is on and all conditions for system activation are not met or if the system becomes disengaged for any reason.
To turn off the hill descent control system, push
the switch to the OFF position.
For additional information, see “Hill descent control system on indicator light” earlier in this section and “Hill descent control system” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

WIC1268

Front row
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones.
The bottom power outlet located on instrument
panel and the power outlet located in the cargo
area are powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.
The top power outlet (if so equipped) located on
the instrument panel and the power outlet located inside the center console are powered only
when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.
Open the cap to use a power outlet.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.

LIC0761

Center console

CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.

LIC0762

Luggage area
● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

STORAGE

WIC1277

Top center tray (if so equipped)

WIC1269

Bottom center tray

WIC0830

Right-hand side 3rd row tray

STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WIC1270

Front row bin

LIC0776

Left-hand side 3rd row bin (if so equipped)

STORAGE BINS

Instruments and controls 2-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LIC0875

2ND ROW UNDER-SEAT STORAGE
BIN
To access the under-seat storage bins:
1
s

Tip up the 2nd row bench seat. Refer to “Tip
up for easy entry to the 3rd row” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section earlier in this
manual.

2
s

Fold up the bottom cushion of the center
seat.

3
s

Push the latch to release the storage bin
cover.

LIC0766

CONSOLE BOX
1 to open the console box lid
Pull up on the lever s
2 .
s

2-38 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC0768

WIC0673

GLOVE BOX

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the top portion of the glove box, push the
A up and raise the lid.
latch s

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

To open the lower portion of the glove box, pull
B down and lower the lid.
the handle s
Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove
box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or
unlock the glove box.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

Instruments and controls 2-39

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LIC0772

MAP POCKETS

WIC1271

LIC0575

Front

SEAT POCKETS
A pocket is located on the back of the driver’s
seat.

CUP HOLDERS
The front cup holders have adapters that can be
removed to accommodate larger cups.

WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

WIC0771

2nd row (rear of front console)
To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front
console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.

LIC0773

3rd row — Type A

Instruments and controls 2-41

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LIC0774

3rd row — Type B

LIC0784

Bottle holder

CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.

LIC0777

CARGO AREA STORAGE
1
To access the floor storage area, push down s
2
to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle s
to lift the luggage board.

LUGGAGE HOOKS
The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo
with ropes or other types of straps.

2-42 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure
cargo.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.

Side finisher

Floor hooks

● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.

When hooking on ropes, do not apply a load of
A hook or 44
more than 55 lb (245 N) to a single s
B hook.
lb (196 N) to a single s

Do not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)
to a single hook.

WTI0125

LTI0126

● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
the cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
the top strap is damaged.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LIC0778

CARGO NETS
WARNING

Large net (if so equipped)
The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.

● Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
● Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or
the net may not stay secured.

To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the
retainers.
To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from
the cargo net retainers.

LIC0793

Right-hand luggage side
net (if so equipped)

WARNING
● The cargo restrained in the luggage
side nets must not exceed 8.5 lb (3.9 kg)
for each net or the net may not stay
secured.
● Do not place sharp objects in the luggage side nets. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury when the vehicle is moving or if
the vehicle is involved in a collision.

2-44 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LIC0794

Left-hand luggage side net
To install a luggage side net, attach the net to the
retainers. To remove, detach the net from the
retainers.

LIC0795

Lift gate net
The lift gate net is not removable.

WARNING
● The cargo restrained in the lift gate net
must not exceed 2 lb (1 kg) or the net
may not stay secured.
● Do not place sharp objects in the luggage side nets. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury when the vehicle is moving or if
the vehicle is involved in a collision.

Instruments and controls 2-45

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
roof rack.
● Heavy loading of the roof rack has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or abnormal handling maneuvers.
● Roof rack load should be evenly
distributed.
● Do not exceed maximum roof rack load
weight capacity.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
WIC0914

ROOF RACK

CAUTION
Use care when placing or removing items
from the roof rack. If you cannot comfortably lift the items onto the roof rack from
the ground, use a ladder or stool.

2-46 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WINDOWS
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof
rack. Do not load more than 200 pounds (91 kg).
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s door
pillar). For more information regarding GVWR
and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section later in this manual.
The front and rear cross bars (if so equipped) can
be adjusted or removed.
To adjust:
A on
1. Loosen the 2 TorxT head fasteners s
both ends of the crossbar.

2. Remove the plugs at the desired position
C ).
(s

B to the desired position
3. Slide the crossbar s
C ) so that the holes in the crossbar line up
(s
with the holes in the sidebar.

7. Always check the tightness of the TorxT
head fasteners.

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING

To remove:
A on
1. Loosen the 2 TorxT head fasteners s
both ends of the crossbar.

2. Remove the crossbar from the roof rack.

● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door
is opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

4. Tighten the 2 TorxT head fasteners on both
ends of the crossbar.
5. Reinstall the plugs at the previous position
A.
s
6. Position your luggage on the crossbars and
secure the luggage with rope.

Instruments and controls 2-47

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close the front and rear
passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch and
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function
at any time, simply release the switch.

WIC1124

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Window lock button
Power door lock switch
Front passenger’s side automatic
switch
Right rear passenger window switch
Left rear passenger window switch
Driver’s side automatic switch

WIC1265

Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
1 .
the window, push the switch and hold it down s
2 .
To close the window, pull the switch up s

2-48 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation, when
the ignition key is in the ON position or for 45
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the
OFF position.
If the control unit detects something caught in a
window equipped with automatic operation as it
is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

LIC0787

LIC0410

Rear power window switch

Automatic operation

The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
1 . To
window, push the switch and hold it down s
2 .
close the window, pull the switch up s

To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down to the
second detent and release it; it need not be held.
The window automatically opens all the way. To
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
window is opening.

Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held.

Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SUNROOF (if so equipped)
To open or close the sunroof part way, push the
switch in any direction while the sunroof is sliding
to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the sunroof
Close the sunroof by pushing the switch toward
2 . Release the switch, then push
UP/CLOSE s
the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the sunroof
up.
To tilt the sunroof down, push the switch toward
1 .
DOWN/OPEN s

WARNING
WIC0882

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if
the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or OFF
position. If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of about
45 seconds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroof
To fully open the sunroof, push the switch toward
1 .
DOWN/OPEN s
To fully close the sunroof, push the switch toward
2 .
UP/CLOSE s

● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open sunroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the sunroof opening while the vehicle is
in motion or while the sunroof is
closing.

CAUTION
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the sunroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the sunroof or surrounding area.

Auto reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the sunroof)
The auto reverse function can be activated when
the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic
operation when the ignition key is in the ON
position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the sunroof occurs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the sunroof.
When closing:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will
immediately open backward.
When tilting down:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immediately tilt up.

2-50 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

INTERIOR LIGHTS
If the auto reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the sunroof will fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof.

WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open sunroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the sunroof opening while the vehicle is
in motion or while the sunroof is
closing.

CAUTION
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the sunroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the sunroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.

If the sunroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
sunroof.

LIC0789

Type A
The interior lights have a three-position switch
and operate regardless of ignition switch position.
1 , the
When the switch is in the ON position s
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes
unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON
position.

Instruments and controls 2-51

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)
The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is
activated when:
● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
● The ignition switch is turned ON.
The lights will turn off automatically after 30 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery
from becoming discharged.
3 , the
When the switch is in the OFF position s
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position.
LIC0792

Type B
2 , the
When the switch is in the O position s
interior lights will stay on for about 30 seconds
when:
● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key
or the power door lock switch while all doors
are closed and the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

LIC0790

To turn the personal lights on, press the switches.
To turn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
● The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed.

2-52 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MAP LIGHTS

CARGO LIGHT

HOMELINKT UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.

LIC0791

LIC0590

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To
turn them off, press the switches again.

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a threeposition switch. To operate, push the switch to
the desired position.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

ON: The light is illuminated.
Normal (center) position: The light illuminates
when any door is opened or unlocked by the
keyfob. The light turns off after 30 seconds when
all doors are closed.
OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of
door position or lock status.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLinkT will retain all programming.
Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information refer to “Programming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-53

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLinkT Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
● During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLinkT
Universal Transceiver.

WIC0986

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer
HomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)
1 blinks (after 20
until the indicator light s
seconds). Release both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLinkT surface.

WIC0987

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold both the HomeLinkT button you want to
program and the hand-held transmitter button.
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.

2-54 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on the HomeLinkT flashes, changing
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming.
To activate the garage door or other programmed device, press and hold the programmed HomeLinkT button — releasing
when the device begins to activate.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkT blinks
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,
HomeLinkT has picked up a “rolling code”
garage door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train the
HomeLinkT to complete the programming
which may require a ladder and another person for convenience.
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” program button located on the garage door
opener’s motor to activate the “training
mode”. This button is usually located near
the antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under a
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to
access the program button.

NOTE:
Once you have pressed and released the
program button on the garage door opener’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
Use the help of a second person for convenience to assist when performing this step.
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the garage door opener program button,
quickly and firmly press and release the
HomeLinkT button you’ve just programmed.
Press and release the HomeLinkT button up
to 3 times to complete the training.
8. Your HomeLinkT button should now be programmed. (To program the remaining
HomeLinkT buttons for additional door or
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)
NOTE:
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
“clear”
all
previously
programmed
HomeLinkT buttons.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer to
the HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required handheld transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
HomeLinkT, continue to press and hold the
HomeLinkT button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Programming HomeLinkT”) while you press and repress (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly
(indicating successful programming).
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener
components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKT
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLinkT Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

Instruments and controls 2-55

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION

If the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the handheld transmitter information:

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
to clear all programming, press and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
● position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLinkT surface.
● press and hold both the HomeLinkT and
hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINKT BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver
button, complete the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT button. Do not release the button until step 4
has been completed.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3
inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLinkT is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this manual.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkT button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkT
buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept
any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-56 Instruments and controls

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D. CV2V67690

Instruments and controls 2-57

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MEMO

2-58 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Intelligent keys (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Opening the fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

KEYS
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.

WPD0128

1.
2.
3.
4.

Two master keys (black) with transponder chip and chrome NISSAN brand
symbol on one side
Valet key (black) with transponder chip
Key number plate
Transponder chip

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.

LPD0350

1.
2.
3.

Two Intelligent Keys
Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent
Keys)
Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEYS (if so equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As many
as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used
with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the
Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the reg-

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

istration process requires erasing all memory in
the Intelligent Key components when registering
new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that
you have to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-off

CAUTION

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.

To prevent the glove box or console box from
being opened during valet hand-off, follow the
procedure below.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.

SPA1951

Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,
which can be used in case of a discharged battery.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Lock the glove box or console box with the
mechanical key.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

See “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS

The mechanical key can be used for operation in
the same way as an ordinary key.

You can only drive your vehicle using the master
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
the key head.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

DOORS
The master key can be used for all the locks.
The valet key cannot be used for the glove box
lock.
To protect belongings when you leave a key with
someone, give them the valet key only.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can duplicate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.

WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

LPD0240

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
1 of the vehicle
Turning the key toward the front s
locks all doors.
2 of the
Turning the key one time toward the rear s
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
3 (where the key can
returning the key to neutral s
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
4 .
all doors s

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition and any door
open, all doors will lock and then unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from
being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

LPD0298

Inside lock

WPD0381

Door lock switch

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH

To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1 , then close the
lock knob to the lock position s
door.

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), to
1 . When locking the door this
the lock position s
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.

To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position s

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2 .
side) to the unlock position s

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote controller function or
pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
LPD0299

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the lock position, the
door can be opened only from the outside.

Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.
Environmental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions.

● When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
● When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
● When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal computer.
● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intelligent Key system warning light (
) will blink
green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.

CAUTION
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,
unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position is impossible when
the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impossible even if
the Intelligent Key is inserted into the ignition
switch. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SPA2038

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
1 .
operating range from the request switch s
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
1 .
from each request switch s

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

WPD0375

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
● Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.

WRS0806

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of operation.

WRS0807

Locking doors
1. Move the selector to the P (Park) position,
push the ignition switch to the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent
Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
1 or
3. Push any door handle request switch s
2 while carrying the Intelligent Key with
s
you.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

WRS0808

NOTE:
● Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
● Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.
● Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

WPD0430

CAUTION
● After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handles or the rear liftgate
opener switch.
● When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The lockout protection may function when
the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
but it is too close to the vehicle.

WRS0807

Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
1 or
2. Push the door handle request switch s
2 .
s

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
1 or
4. Push the door handle request switch s
2 again within 5 seconds to unlock all
s
doors.

If a door or the liftgate handle is pulled while
unlocking the doors, that door or liftgate may not
be unlocked. Returning the handle to its original
position will unlock the door or liftgate. If the door

WRS0808

or liftgate does not unlock after returning the
handle, push the door handle request switch to
unlock the door and liftgate.
All doors and the liftgate will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is
performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch.
● Opening any door or the liftgate.
● Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
WPD0430

The interior light can be turned off without waiting
for 30 seconds by performing one of the following operations.
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
● Locking the doors with the remote controller.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

● When the doors or the rear liftgate are open
or not closed securely.
● When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.

WPD0359

Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push the
Key.

button on the Intelligent

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The interior light illuminates for 30 seconds when
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in
the DOOR position.

CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 30
seconds by performing one of the following operations.
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
WPD0360

Unlocking doors
1. Push the

button on the Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Push the
button again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the
button.
● Opening any doors.

Opening windows (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows
equipped with automatic operation simultaneously.
● To open the windows, press the
button on the Intelligent Key longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
the
button on the Intelligent Key.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
WPD0374

WPD0362

Using the panic alarm

Silencing the horn beep feature

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pushing and holding the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 second.

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
● it has run for 25 seconds, or
● any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
See the troubleshooting guide that follows and
“Vehicle information display indicator lights and
warnings” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Symptom

Possible Cause

When pushing the ignition switch to stop
the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds
continuously.

The selector lever is not in the P (Park)
position.

When opening the driver’s door to get out
of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times
and the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.

The NO KEY warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position
and the selector lever is not in the P (Park)
position.

When closing the door after getting out of
the vehicle

When closing the door with the inside lock
knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

When pushing the door handle request
switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately A door is not closed securely.
2 seconds.
The door handle request switch is pushed
before the door is closed.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Remedy
Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
Push the ignition switch to the OFF
position.

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the
OFF position.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the door securely.
Push the door handle request switch after
the door is closed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the
interior lights, and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.
Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,
can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigation
system, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”
later in this section. For vehicles with navigation
system, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in
the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section later in this manual.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The
effective distance depends upon the conditions
around the vehicle.
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
The keyfob will not function when:
● the battery is discharged.
● the distance between the vehicle and the
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the keyfob:
● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.
● Do not drop the keyfob.
● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
another object.
● Do not place the keyfob for an extended
period in an area where temperatures
exceed 140°F (60°C).
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

LPD0209

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close the hood and all doors.
4. Push the
button on the keyfob. All
the doors lock. The hazard warning lights
flash twice and the horn beeps once to
indicate all doors are locked.

The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● When the
button is pushed with all
doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked.

Push the
5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all
doors are completely closed.

● If a door is open and you push the
button, the doors will lock but the horn will
not beep and the hazard warning lights will
not flash.
The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles
without navigation system, refer to “Silencing the
horn beep feature” later in this section. For vehicles with navigation system, refer to “Comfort &
convenience settings” in the “Display screen,
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section later in this manual.

button on the keyfob again within

The interior lights can be turned off without waiting 30 seconds by inserting the key into the
ignition and turning to the ON or START position,
locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the
interior light switch to the off position.

Auto relock
LPD0210

Unlocking doors
Push the

button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all
doors are completely closed with the ignition
key in any position except the ON position.

When the
button on the keyfob is pushed,
all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute
unless one of the following operations is performed:
● Any door is opened.
● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
the key is turned from OFF to ON.

● The interior lights turn on and the light timer
activates for 30 seconds when the interior
light switch is in the DOOR position with the
ignition key in any position except the ON
position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Opening windows (if so equipped)
The keyfob allows you to open the front windows
simultaneously.
● To open the front windows, press the
button on the keyfob for longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
the
button on the keyfob.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the keyfob.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drive
positioner memory
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory
setting.
See “Automatic drive positioner” later in this section.

LPD0211

LPD0262

Using the panic alarm

Silencing the horn beep feature

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pushing and holding the
button on the
keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the keyfob.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.

If you change the horn beep and lamp flash
feature with the keyfob, the display screen
(if so equipped) will not show the current
mode and cannot be used to change the
mode. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display
screen control.

The panic alarm stops when:
● it has run for 25 seconds, or
● any button is pushed on the keyfob.

NOTE:

To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Using the interior lights

The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.

Push the
button on the keyfob once to turn
on the interior lights.

To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
in the “Instruments and controls” section earlier in
this manual.

Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pushing and holding the
keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
● it has run for 25 seconds, or
● any button is pushed on the keyfob.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HOOD

LIFT GATE

WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.

WARNING
● Always be sure the lift gate has been
closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
● Do not drive with the lift gate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the lift gate.

LPD0302
1

Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver’s side instrument panel. The
hood will spring up slightly.

2
s

Push the lever at the front of the hood to the
side as illustrated with your fingertips and
raise the hood.

3
s

Insert the support rod into the slot on the
underside of the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make
sure it locks into place.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

GLASS HATCH

LPD0300

The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors including the lift gate simultaneously.
To open the lift gate, press the hatch release
switch under the license finisher to release the
latch. Pull the lift gate open.
To close, lower and gently push the lift gate
down. The power latch will engage to securely
latch the lift gate.

LPD0251

LIFT GATE RELEASE
If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked with
the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a
discharged battery, follow these steps:

LPD0301

To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle to
release the glass hatch, then pull up on the glass
hatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatch
down securely.

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift
gate.
2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
NOTE:
The lift gate must be unlocked in order to
open the glass hatch.

WARNING
Do not drive with the glass hatch open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust
gas” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.

WPD0436

LPD0253

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER LID

FUEL-FILLER CAP

Pull on the finger tab to open.

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
heard.
1 while
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s
refueling.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
malfunction indicator light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue
to
drive
the
vehicle.
The
light should turn off after a
light
few driving trips. If the
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
● For additional information, see the
“Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
earlier in this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

STEERING WHEEL

PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not adjust the pedal position with your
foot on the pedal.

LPD0304

TILT OPERATION
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the
steering wheel up or down to the desired position.
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel
in place.

LPD0305

The accelerator and brake pedals can be adjusted for driving comfort.
Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the
1
brake and accelerator pedal position forward s
2 . Pedal adjustment can only be
or backward s
performed when:
● Ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC position
● Ignition switch is ON and the selector lever
is in the P (Park) position
The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be adjusted separately.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SUN VISORS
3
s

Slide the extension sun visor in or out as
needed.

CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

WPD0307

VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
WPD0315
1

To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.

2
s

To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic
anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
1 will illuminate when the
The indicator light s
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors

WPD0126

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
1 reduces glare from the
The night position s
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
2 when driving in daylight
Use the day position s
hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

2 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
s

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.

WPD0331

Type A

Type A
To turn off the anti-glare feature, push and hold
the
button for about 8 seconds. The indicator light will turn off.
To turn on the anti-glare feature again, push and
hold the
button for about 8 seconds. The
indicator light will turn on.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
the
button as described in the chart below
to activate various features of the automatic antiglare review mirror.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

For information on the compass and outside temperature display, see “Compass and outside
temperature display” in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

Feature:
Push and hold
(Push button again for about 1 secthe
button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second

Compass/outside temperature display toggles on/off (if so equipped)

8 seconds

Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
toggles on/off

11 seconds

Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings (if
so equipped)

13 seconds

Compass enters calibration mode (if
so equipped)

For more information about the compass and
outside mirror features (if so equipped), refer to
“Compass and outside temperature display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section.

WPD0333

Type B

Type B
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press
the
button. The indicator light will turn off.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press
the
button again. The indicator light will
turn on.
For information on HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver operation, see “HomeLinkT Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
LPD0237

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
1 to select the right or left
Move the small switch s
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
2 .
using the large switch s

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see “Rear window and outside
mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the
“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

LPD0259

Foldable outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so
equipped)
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the selected outside mirror surface downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or
right position. Only one mirror can be selected at
a time.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)
Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). The
selected mirror will turn downward.
The selected mirror surface will return to its original position when any of the following have occurred:

The automatic drive positioner system has two
features:
● Memory storage function
● Entry/exit function

● The shift selector lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).
● The outside mirror control switch is set to the
N (Neutral) position.
● The ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE:
If the outside mirror control switch is in the
neutral position, neither mirror will turn
downward when the shift selector lever is
moved to R (Reverse).
For more information regarding this feature and
how to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-down
adjustment in the automatic drive positioner
memory, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” later
in this section.

LPD0306

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat, accelerator
and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be
stored in the automatic drive positioner memory.
Follow these procedures to use the memory system.
1. Set the automatic transmission selector lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition ON.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator and
brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the
desired positions by manually operating
each adjusting switch. For additional information, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section and “Pedal position adjustment” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in this
section.
During this step, do not turn the ignition to
any position other than ON.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at
least 1 second.
The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.
After the indicator light goes off, the selected positions are stored in the selected
memory (1 or 2).

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory position.
2. While the indicator light for the memory
switch being set is illuminated for 5 secbutton on the keyfob.
onds, press the
The indicator light will blink. After the indicator light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that
memory setting.
With the key removed from the ignition switch,
press the
button on the keyfob. The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is saved to the
memory switch, the keyfob automatically
re-links.

Confirming memory storage

Linking a keyfob to a stored memory
position

● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET
switch. If the main memory has not been
stored, the indicator light will come on for
approximately 0.5 seconds. When the
memory has stored the position, the indicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the following procedure.

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the memory storage function will
be canceled and must be restarted before a

If a new memory is stored in the same memory
switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

stored memory position can be set again.
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
restart the memory storage function. You
can also restart the memory storage function
using the following procedure.
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
fuse.
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
two times with the ignition key in the LOCK
position.
Once the memory storage function has been
restarted, you can store a memory position.
See “Memory storage function” earlier in this
section.

Selecting the memorized position
Set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position, then:
● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s
door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully
for at least 1 second, or
● Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
and push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for
at least 1 second.
The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,
and outside mirrors will move to the memorized
position with the indicator light blinking, and then
the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat
will automatically move when the shift selector
lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the
driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more
easily.

tems” section of this manual. For vehicles without
navigation system, see your NISSAN dealer.

Restarting the entry/exit function

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat is turned on while the automatic drive
positioner is operating.
● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is not
pushed and held for at least 1 second.

● When the key is removed from the ignition
switch and the driver’s door is opened.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart
the entry/exit function using the following procedure.

● When the driver’s door is opened with the
ignition key turned to LOCK.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
fuse.

● When the shift selector lever is moved from
P (Park) to any other position.

● When the ignition key is turned from ACC to
LOCK with the driver’s door open.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
two times with the ignition key in the LOCK
position.

● When the driver’s door remains open more
than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is
not in the ON position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

The automatic drive positioner system can be
adjusted and canceled. For vehicles with navigation system, see “Comfort & convenience settings” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section of this manual.
For vehicles without navigation system, see your
NISSAN dealer.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

The driver’s seat will return to the previous position:
● When the key is inserted into the ignition
switch and the driver’s door is closed.
● When the driver’s door is closed with the key
turned to LOCK.
● When the key is turned from ACC to ON
while the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)
position.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or canceled. For vehicles with navigation system, see
“Comfort & convenience settings” in the “Display
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-

SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will not
work or will stop operating under the following
conditions:

● When the seat has been already moved to
the memorized position.
● When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h).
● When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner
is operating.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Rearview monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Heater and air conditioner (manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 4-39
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
CompactFlash™ (CF) player operation
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Music Box hard-disk drive audio system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
CD/CF (CompactFlash™) care and cleaning. . . . . . 4-83
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Remote audio system controls
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Before operating the DVD mobile
entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Playing a digital versatile disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

Remote control operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100
How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
Command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-123
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
Voice command learning function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126
Voice recognition settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-131

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.

WHA0881

1. NISSAN controller (P. 4-3)

5. INFO button (P. 4-4)

2. STATUS button (P. 4-4)

6. – (brightness control) button

3. + (brightness control) button

7. SETTING button (P. 4-9)

8. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3)

OFF brightness control button
(P. 4-15)

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—arosenma X

● Finish setup.

When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.

4
In some screens pressing the BACK button s
accepts the changes made during setup.

If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
panel.
“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen.
By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
WHA0883

HOW TO USE THE NISSAN
CONTROLLER
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on
the display screen. Select an item on the display
2 or the
using the main directional buttons s
3 . Then press the ENTER button s
1
center dial s
to select the item or perform the action.
4 button has two functions:
The BACK button s

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).
4 during setup,
If you press the BACK button s
the setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:
Shows that the NISSAN controller may be
used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and
select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections available for that screen (for example, 5/6).
5. Footer/Information Line:
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently highlighted (for example, Enhances stereo imaging and sound).
LHA0914

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center display screen in menus. Whenever a menu selection is made or menu item is highlighted, different
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen (for example, press the SETTING
button > then select the “Audio” key).

HOW TO USE THE STATUS
BUTTON
To display the status of the audio, climate control
system and fuel consumption, press the STATUS
button.
The following information will appear when the
STATUS button is pressed:
Audio → Audio and climate control system →
Audio, climate control temperature settings, average fuel economy and distance to empty →
Audio

LHA0915

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows
vehicle information for your convenience.
The information shown on the screen should be a
guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
See the following for details.

2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Bass, etc.).

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0921

Fuel economy
Press the INFO button then select the “Fuel
Economy” key using the NISSAN controller and
press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel
Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy
Record.
Distance to empty (MI or km)
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3
mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the
battery cables, the display might show (**.*).
Resetting fuel economy
The average fuel economy calculation can be
reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key
using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.

LHA0922

Fuel economy record
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Economy” key, then select the “View” key using
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
button.
The average fuel consumption history will be
displayed in a graph form along with the average
fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition
and the temperature.
In case of low tire pressure, a message is displayed on the screen:
LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

LHA0923

Tire pressure information
To display tire pressure information, press the
INFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” key
using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indicates that the pressure is being measured. After
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
be displayed randomly.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.

LHA0924

Trip computer
Press the INFO button, then select the “Trip
Computer” key using the NISSAN controller and
press the ENTER button.
The trip computer will display the following items:
● Elapsed Time – Journey time since the last
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59
minutes.
● Driving Distance – Distance driven (mile or
km) since the last reset.
● Average Speed – Average speed driven
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Resetting the trip computer
Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.
Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs to
be reset using the NISSAN controller and press
the ENTER button.
To reset all of the items in the trip computer select
the “Reset ALL” key and press the ENTER button.
A confirmation screen will appear. Select the
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

LHA0925

LHA0926

Maintenance items

Changing the maintenance interval

Press the INFO button and select the “Maintenance” key using the NISSAN controller and
press the ENTER button; the maintenance information will be displayed on the screen.

Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys using
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
button to display the screen to change the maintenance interval.
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button. Use the
NISSAN controller to change the maintenance
interval; to accept the changes press the BACK
button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● The ignition key is turned ON the next time
the vehicle will be driven.

Resetting the maintenance interval
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0
miles (km), select the “Reset Distance” key using
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
button.

To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
● The “Reset” key is selected.
● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).
LHA0839

● The maintenance interval is set again.

Displaying the maintenance notice reminder
Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key and press
the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval. The indicator light will illuminate
when it is ON.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the
following conditions are met:
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition key is turned OFF.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0927

Type A

HOW TO USE THE SETTING
BUTTON

WHA0937

Type B

LHA0929

Display settings
Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER
button. The Display settings screen will appear.

When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use
the NISSAN controller to select each item to be
set and press the ENTER button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

To turn the screen on:
● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
ON” key. Then set the screen to on by pressing the ENTER button, or
● Hold the
OFF button for approximately 2 seconds and the message “resuming display” will appear and the “Display ON”
key will be automatically turned on (no amber indicator).
Background color
LHA0930

WHA0823

Brightness/contrast:

Display off:

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map
background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust
the brightness to darker or brighter and the contrast to lower or higher.

Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the
“Display ON” turns amber and the message
above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,
HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode
button on the control panel is operated, the display turns on for that operation. If one of the
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
not automatically turn off until that operation is
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off automatically after 5 seconds.

The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.

Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Daylight Savings Time:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will disappear.

LHA0931

LHA0932

Beeps settings

Clock

Select the “Beeps” key and press the ENTER
button. The Beeps settings screen will appear.

The following display will appear after pressing
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key using the NISSAN controller and pressing
the ENTER button.

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a
beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed.

On-screen Clock:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
Clock Format:
Choose either the 12h (12 hour) clock display or
the 24h (24 hour) clock display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Atlantic
● Newfoundland
● Aleutian
● Hawaii
● Alaska

LHA0933

LHA0943

Time Zone:

Clock Adjust:

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
screen will appear.

Adjust the time by manually inputting the correct
time.

Select one of the following zones, depending on
the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key and pressing the ENTER button to
enable that time zone (indicator light will illuminate for that location).

● 0 – 9:
Select to change the number in the display.
● Modify:
Select to change the number at the cursor
position.

● Pacific

● >:
Select to move the cursor position to the
right.

● Mountain
● Central

● <:
Select to move the cursor position to the left.

● Eastern

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● OK:
Select to accept the changes made and
return to the clock setting display.
After selection/settings, press the BACK button
or any other mode button to accept the changes.

LHA1015

Comfort & Convenience settings (if so
equipped)

LHA1016

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the
NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER button. The comfort and convenience option screen
will be displayed.
You can set the following operating conditions by
selecting the desired item using the NISSAN
controller, then pressing the ENTER button. The
indicator light, box at the left of the selected item,
alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER
button is pressed.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Auto interior illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
any door is unlocked.
Speed sensing wiper interval: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed.
Remote key response horn: Select to turn on
or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the
LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.
NOTE:
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
not be changed with the display. Use the
keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control.
Remote key response lights: Select to turn on
or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used
when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
not be changed with the display. Use the
keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control.
Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of
time before doors automatically re-lock.
Selective door unlock: When this item is
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock
operation is performed again within 5 seconds.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once.
Reset all settings to default: Select to
change all the comfort and convenience systems
to their default settings.

LHA0934

Language / Units
Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Language / Units” key and press the ENTER button.
Select which setting you want to change using
the NISSAN controller and selecting either the
“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” key
by pressing the ENTER button.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

OFF BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
OFF button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day
or the
night
display. Then, adjust the brightness
by using the NISSAN controller.
The display brightness can also be adjusted using the + (brighter) button or the 2 (dimmer)
button.
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
LHA0935

LHA0936

Select Language:

Select Units:

Select the “English” key, the “Français” key or the
“Español” key to change the language shown on
the display.

Select the “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric” (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
shown on the display.

Press and hold the
OFF button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.

Audio settings
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” later in
this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
9. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-17)
10. ROUTE button*
11. ZOOM IN button*
12. MAP button*
13. ZOOM OUT button*
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
**For information on the PHONE button, see
“BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” later in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
LHA0880

1. STATUS button (P. 4-20)
2. DEST button*
3. NISSAN controller (P. 4-17)
4. PHONE button**

OFF brightness control button
(P. 4-33)

6. INFO button (P. 4-20)
7. SETTING button (P. 4-25)

ENTER button — This is a button on the control
panel.
“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen.
By selecting this key, you can proceed to the next
function.

8. VOICE button*

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

4 during setup,
If you press the BACK button s
the setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.
4
In some screens pressing the BACK button s
accepts the changes made during setup.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.

5 functions, refer to the
For the VOICE button s
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH
SCREEN
LHA0882

HOW TO USE THE NISSAN
CONTROLLER
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on
the display screen. Select an item on the display
2 (certain
using the main directional buttons s
Navigation System functions use the additional
6 ) or the center dial s
3 .
directional buttons s
1 to select the
Then press the ENTER button s
item or perform the action.
4 button has two functions:
The BACK button s

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system.

CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if it is hit with a hard
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
not touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mercury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WHA0885

Touch screen operation
With this system, the same operations as those
for the NISSAN controller are possible using the
touch screen operation.
Selecting the item:

WHA0887

WHA0889

Adjusting the item:

Inputting characters:

1 or the “2” key s
2 to adjust
Touch the “+” key s
3 to scroll up to
the settings. Touch the “UP” key s
4
the previous page, or touch the “DOWN” key s
to scroll down to next page.

1 .
Touch the letter or number key s

There are some options available when inputting
characters.
● Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.

Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio” key,
1 on the screen. Touch
touch the “Audio” key s
2 to return to the previous
the “BACK” key s
screen.

● Lowercase:
Shows lowercase characters.
● Space:
Inserts a space.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Symbols:
Shows symbols such as the question mark
(?).

2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illumination, etc.).

● Delete:
Deletes the last character that has been
input with one touch. Touch and hold the
“Delete” key to delete all of the characters.

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:
Shows that the NISSAN controller may be
used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and
select more options.

● OK:
Completes the character input.

4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections available for that screen (for example, 1/14).

Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the
screen.

START-UP SCREEN
When you push the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is
displayed on the screen. When you read and
agree with the warning, press the ENTER button.
If you do not push the ENTER button, you will not
be able to use the navigation system.
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

LHA0890

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN

5. Footer/Information Line:
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently highlighted (for example, Cabin lighting when
unlocking doors).

Vehicle functions are viewed on the center display screen in menus. Whenever a menu selection is made or menu item is highlighted, different
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen (for example, press the SETTING
button > then select the “Comfort & Conv.”
key).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HOW TO USE THE STATUS
BUTTON
To display the status of the audio, climate control
system, fuel consumption and navigation system,
press the STATUS button.
The following information will appear when the
STATUS button is pressed:
Audio → Audio and Climate control system →
Audio, climate control temperature settings, average fuel economy and distance to empty →
Audio, climate control temperature settings and
Navigation System → Audio
LHA0892

LHA0893

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON

Fuel economy

Press the INFO button; the display screen shows
vehicle and navigation information for your convenience.

Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Economy” key using the NISSAN controller and
press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel
Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy
Record.

The information shown on the screen should be a
guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
See the following for details.

Distance to empty (MI or km)
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

NOTE:
● If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is
turned OFF may continue to be displayed.
● When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3
mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the
battery cables, the display might show (**.*).
Resetting fuel economy
The average fuel economy calculation can be
reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key
using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.

LHA0894

LHA0895

Fuel economy record

Tire pressure information

Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Economy” key, then select the “View” key using
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
button.

To display tire pressure information, press the
INFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” key
using the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.

The average fuel consumption history will be
displayed in a graph form along with the average
fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indicates that the pressure is being measured. After
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition
and the temperature.

Resetting the trip computer
Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.
Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs to
be reset using the NISSAN controller and press
the ENTER button.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is displayed on the screen:
LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

To reset all of the items in the trip computer select
the “Reset ALL” key and press the ENTER button.
A confirmation screen will appear; select the
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

WARNING
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

LHA0896

Trip computer
Press the INFO button, then select the “Trip
Computer” key using the NISSAN controller and
press the ENTER button.
The trip computer will display the following items:
● Elapsed Time – Journey time since the last
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59
minutes.
● Driving Distance – Distance driven (miles or
km) since the last reset.
● Average Speed – Average speed driven
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Resetting the maintenance interval
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0
miles (km), select the “Reset Distance” key using
the NISSAN controller and press the ENTER
button.

LHA0897

LHA0898

Maintenance items

Changing the maintenance interval

Press the INFO button and select the “Maintenance” key using the NISSAN controller and
press the ENTER button; the maintenance information will be displayed on the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● The ignition key is turned ON the next time
the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
● The “Reset” key is selected.
● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).
LHA0839

● The maintenance interval is set again.

LHA0908

Other items

Displaying the maintenance notice reminder

Press the INFO button and select the “Others”
key using the NISSAN controller and press the
ENTER button to view information on the navigation and voice recognition systems.

Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key and press
the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval. The indicator light will illuminate
when it is ON.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the
following conditions are met:
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition key is turned OFF.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Navigation version
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Traffic Info.
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Where am I?
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

GPS Satellite Info.
LHA0899

Voice recognition
If you use the voice recognition system for the
first time or you do not know how to operate it,
you can display the voice command list or the
user guide for confirmation. For more information,
see “NISSAN voice recognition system” later in
this section.
Command List:
Displays a list of voice commands that will work
with the system.

Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

LHA0884

HOW TO USE THE SETTING
BUTTON
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use
the NISSAN controller to select each item to be
set and press the ENTER button.

User Guide:
Displays a simplified operation manual of the
voice recognition system and how to use the
voice commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0901

LHA0902

WHA0823

Display settings

Brightness/contrast:

Display off:

Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER
button. The Display settings screen will appear.

The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

To turn the screen on:

Clock Format:

● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
ON” key. Then set the screen to on by pressing the ENTER button, or

Choose either the 12h (12 hour) clock display or
the 24h (24 hour) clock display.
Offset Adjust:
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per
minute.

OFF button for approxi● Hold the
mately 2 seconds and the message “resuming display” will appear and the “Display ON”
key will be automatically turned on (no amber indicator).

Background color
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.

LHA0904

Clock
The following display will appear after pressing
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key using the NISSAN controller and pressing
the ENTER button.
On-screen Clock:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Atlantic
● Newfoundland
● Hawaii
● Alaska
After selection/settings, press the BACK button
or any other mode button to accept the changes.

LHA0905

LHA0938

Time Zone:

Comfort & Convenience settings

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
screen will appear.

Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the
NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER button. The comfort and convenience option screen
will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions by
selecting the desired item using the NISSAN
controller, then pressing the ENTER button. The
indicator light, box at the right of the selected
item, alternately turns on and off each time the
ENTER button is pressed.

● Central

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

● Pacific

● Eastern

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Remote key response horn: Select to turn on
or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the
LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.
NOTE:
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
not be changed with the display. Use the
keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control.

LHA0939

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

LHA0940

Auto interior illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
any door is unlocked.
Auto headlights sensitivity: Select to adjust
the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher
(right) or lower (left).
Auto headlights off delay: Select to change
the duration of the automatic headlight off timer
from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 second
periods.
Speed sensing wiper interval: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed.

Remote key response lights: Select to turn on
or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used
when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.
NOTE:
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
not be changed with the display. Use the
keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control.
Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length of
time before doors automatically re-lock.
Selective door unlock: When this item is
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock
operation is performed again within 5 seconds.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once.
Intelligent Key lock / unlock: Select to turn
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
pushing the door handle request switch.
Intelligent Key lock reply: Select to change
the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when
a door handle request switch is pushed.
Select to turn off all sounds made when a door
handle request switch is pushed, by selecting the
“OFF” key.
Slide driver seat back on exit: Select to turn
on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backwards
for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is opened. After
getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition
switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat
moves to the previous position.

LHA0909

LHA0910

Others settings

Voice Recognition:

Select the “Others” key by using the NISSAN
controller and pressing the ENTER button. Voice
recognition, language and units setting screen
will be displayed.

Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Voice
Recognition” key and press the ENTER button;
the following options will be displayed:
● Command List
Displays the voice command list on the
screen.
● Minimize Voice Feedback
When this item is turned to ON, vocal feedback is reduced if the voice recognition system is activated.

Reset all settings to default: Select to
change all the comfort and convenience systems
to their default settings.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Voice Command Learning
Select this item to have the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system learn the user’s voice.
The system can memorize the voices of up to
three persons. For the details of this function, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition
system” later in this section.
● User Guide
Select this item to learn the operation flow of
the NISSAN Voice Recognition system with
the help of a step-by-step guide.

LHA0911

LHA0912

Language / Units

Select Language:

Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Language / Units” key and press the ENTER button.
Select which setting you want to change using
the NISSAN controller and selecting either the
“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” key
by pressing the ENTER button.

Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to
change the language shown on the display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Volume and beeps settings
Navigation volume
For navigation volume settings refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding these settings.
Phone volume
For phone volume settings refer to “BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation System” later in this section.

LHA0913

WHA0903

Select Units:

Beep setting

Select the “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric” (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
shown on the display.

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a
beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed.

Audio settings

Phone settings

For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” later in
this section.

For phone settings refer to “BluetoothT HandsFree Phone System With Navigation System”
later in this section.

Navigation settings
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding these settings.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
OFF BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
OFF button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day
or the
night
display. Then, adjust the brightness
by using the NISSAN controller.
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Press and hold the
OFF button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.

When the selector lever is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the
view directly to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING
● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper, and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground.
● The rearview camera is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe
to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
● Objects viewed in the rearview monitor
differ from actual distance because a
wide-angle lens is used.
● Make sure that the lift gate is securely
closed when backing up.

● When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and
distances to objects with reference to the
A are displayed on the monitor.
bumper line s

● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed beside the license plate light.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

OPERATING TIPS
● When the selector lever is shifted to R (Reverse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the rearview monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.

LHA0437

They are indicated as reference distances to
objects. The lines and colors in the display indiA in
cate distances from the back bumper line s
the illustration.
1
s
2
s
3
s
4
s

1.5 feet (0.5 m) red
3 feet (1 m) yellow
7 feet (2 m) green
10 feet (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider than
the actual clearance.

LHA1021

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
To adjust the quality of the screen, press the
SETTING button.
● To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,
Tint, Color, Contrast, and Black Level of the
rearview monitor, press the SETTING button
with the rearview monitor on, then touch one
of the adjustment keys. Press the “–” or “+”
key on the item and adjust the level.
● Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint
and Color of the rearview monitor while the
vehicle is moving.

● It may take some time until the rearview
monitor is displayed after the selector lever
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects
may be distorted momentarily until the rearview monitor screen is displayed completely.
When the selector lever is returned to a
position other than R (Reverse), it may take
some time until the screen changes. Objects
on the screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display objects. This is not a malfunction.
● When strong light directly enters the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

VENTILATORS
● The colors of objects on the rearview monitor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
● When the contrast of objects is low at night,
pressing the SETTING button may not
change the brightness.
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the rearview monitor may not display objects. Clean the camera.
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA0488

● Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
● Do not use body wax on the camera window.
Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

WHA0510

rear center console ventilators
(if so equipped)
Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas1 , driver and passenger
senger side windowss
2 centers
3 , rear passenger compartment
front s
4 and rear center console (if so equipped) vens
5 by moving the ventilator slide and/or
tilatorss
ventilator assemblies.

● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button
ON position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
LHA0489

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Fan control dial
Temperature control dial
Air flow control dial
Air conditioner button (if so equipped)
Rear window defroster button (if so
equipped)
Air recirculation button (if so equipped)

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.

Push the

button to the on position when:

Air flow control dial

● driving on a dusty road.

The air flow control dial allows you to select the
air flow outlets.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.

MAX
A/C

● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

— Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling (air
conditioning if so equipped).
— Air flows from center and side
ventilators.
— Air flows from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.

OFF position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Air conditioner button (if so
equipped)

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.

The button is provided only on vehicles equipped
with an air conditioner.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired (1 - 4) position and push the
button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator
light comes on when the air conditioner is operating. To turn off the air conditioner, push
the
button again.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center ventilators.
1. Push the

button to the off position.

Rear window defroster switch (if so
equipped)

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.

For more information about the rear window defroster switch, see “Rear window defroster
switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

HEATER OPERATION

Defrosting or defogging

Heating

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.

This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets.
1. Push the
button to the off position for
normal heating.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and the
temperature control lever to the full HOT
position.
position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on (however,
the indicator light will not illuminate) if the
outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). The air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is
turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even
if the air flow control dial is turned to a
position. This
position other than the
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
windshield. The
mode automatically
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
into the passenger compartment to further
improve the defogging performance.

Bi-level heating
This mode directs cooler air from the side and
center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets.
When the temperature control dial is moved to
the full hot or full cool position, the air between
the vents and the floor outlets is the same temperature.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

1. Push the
button (if so equipped) to
the off position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
● When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (however,
the indicator light will not illuminate) if the
outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). The air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is
turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even
if the air flow control dial is turned to a

position. This
position other than the
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
windshield. The
mode (if so
equipped) automatically turns off, allowing
outside air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if
so equipped)
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired (1 - 4) position, and push in the
button to activate the air conditioner. When the
air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying
functions are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Push the

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Push the
comes on.

button. The indicator light

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
● For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, push the
button to
the on position (indicator light on). Be sure
to return the
button to the off position
for normal cooling.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Push the

button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Push the
comes on.

button. The indicator light

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—arosenma X

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
3. Push the
comes on.

button. The indicator light

When the
or
are selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (however, the
indicator light will not illuminate) if the outside
temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). The air
conditioning system will continue to operate until
the fan control dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle
is shut off, even if the air flow control dial is turned
to a position other than the
position. This
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips
● Keep the windows and sunroof (if so
equipped) closed while the air conditioner is
in operation.
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. For additional information
on heating and cooling see “Heater and air conditioner” in this section”. The air recirculation
(
) button should always be in the OFF
position for heating and defrosting.

● The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WHA0780

WHA0781

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WHA0782

WHA0783

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WHA1063

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic)
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)

LHA0859

Driver temperature control dial/AUTO
button
2. A/C ON/OFF button
3. Fan speed control (increase)
4. Front window defroster button
5. MODE button
6. Passenger temperature control dial/
DUAL button
7. System OFF
8. Fan speed control (decrease)
9. Rear window defroster button
10. Air recirculation button

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.

This mode may be normally used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be
displayed.)
2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control
dial to the left or right to set the desired
temperature. Driver and passenger temperatures can be set independently. Press
DUAL to activate dual climate control functions. Turn the passenger’s side temperature
control dial to the left or right to set the
desired passenger’s temperature.
● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F
(24°C) for normal operation.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off
are also controlled automatically.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Push the defroster control button
to
turn the system on. The display will show the
defrost icon.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
to set the desired temperature.

or the A/C button is pressed even if the air
flow MODE control button is used to select a
position. This
position other than the
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
windshield. The air recirculation mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control buttons
Press the fan speed control buttons
to manually control the fan speed.

+/–

Pushing the MODE button manually controls air
flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side
ventilators.
— Air flows from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press OFF to turn the system off.

Press the OFF button.

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.

OPERATING TIPS

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, press the fan control speed button
until it reaches the maximum speed
.

Air recirculation

● As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the
auto mode.

The
mode automatically turns off, allowing
outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to prevent fogging.

● When the defroster control button
is
activated, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures
above 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for
more than one minute, the air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the fan
control is turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off,

Air flow control

Push the air recirculation button
to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the
AUTO button to return to automatic mode.

● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.

The air recirculation button will not be activated
when the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, or
floor/defrost mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER
Rear seat temperature and fan speed can be
controlled from both the front seat overhead console controls or the rear seat controls (on back of
center console).
Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer control
of the rear climate functions to the rear passenger’s.
To operate the rear air conditioner, the engine
must be running.

LIC0835

If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the air
conditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fan
speed positions, air is discharged from the rear
vents at the corresponding speed.

1 , located on the top center
The sunload sensor s
of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything
on or around this sensor.

LHA0628

1.
2.

Rear fan speed control dial.
Rear temperature control dial.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.

RADIO

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
WHA0630

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and
off, and controls fan speed.

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows rear passengers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF (power)
knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio
with the engine not running, the key should be
turned to the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30
miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo
FM. External influences may sometimes interfere
with FM station reception even if the FM station is
within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM
signal is directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a
line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same
characteristics as light. For example, they will
reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter) static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.

the vehicle outside of any metal or large building
for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary
data.
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XMT satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is first installed or the
battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may
not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait
more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
LHA0099

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

● The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
● CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
● The following CDs may not work properly:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CHECK DISC:
● Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT:
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 CD).

CompactFlash™ (CF) player
● Do not force a CF card into the slot. This
could damage the CF card and/or player.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the CF card and dehumidify
or ventilate the player completely.
● The CF player sometimes cannot function
when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.

space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.

● Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.

● Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.

Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash™
(CF) with MP3 or WMA
Terms:
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file
size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:
44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no
perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant
parts of a sound signal that the human ear
doesn’t hear.
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
* WindowsT and Windows MediaT are registered trademarks and trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States of
America and/or other countries.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CompactFlash™ is a trademark of the SanDiskT
Corporation in the United States of America
and/or other countries.

Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD/CF with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

WHA0773

Playback order chart

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Specification chart:
Supported media

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported file systems

MP3
Supported
versions*1

WMA*2

CompactFlash card: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
Version

MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency

8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate

8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

Version

WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate
Tag information

32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

With navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Without navigation system:
Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation

With navigation system: 128 characters
Without navigation system: 64 characters

Displayable character codes*3

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

Cannot play

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names
and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality

Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts
playing.

Music cuts off or skips

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate
files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the
next song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in
the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see 9Audio operation precautions9 earlier in this section.
Power button and VOL control knob
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,
then press the power button. If you listen to the
radio with the engine not running, turn the key to
the ACC position. The mode (radio or CD) that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off resumes playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the power button again turns the system off.
Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase
volume or to the left to decrease volume.
MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BALANCE and CLOCK):
LHA0858

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

PRESET A·B·C button
CD eject button
MENU button
CD insert slot
CD button
FM·AM button

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

TUNE buttons
RPT button
Power/VOL control knob
RDM button
Station select (1 - 6) buttons
SEEK buttons

Press the MENU button to change the mode as
follows:
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Audio
or OFF → BAS
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
the MENU button until the desired mode appears
in the display. Press the SEEK button to adjust
Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

use the SEEK button to adjust Fader and Balance
modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between
the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts
the sound between the right and left speakers.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU
button will change the mode as follows:
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK →
Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment →
Audio or OFF → BAS
For more information on setting the clock, see
“Clock set” later in this section.
Clock operation
Press the MENU button until CLOCK is displayed; use the SEEK button to turn the clock
display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF).
Clock set
If the clock is not displayed with the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to
select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-

ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use the
SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode.
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
CLOCK mode appears; press the SEEK
button until CLK ON appears.
2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will
start flashing.
3. Press the SEEK button
adjust the hour.

4. Press the MENU button again; the display
will switch to the minute adjustment mode.
5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK
button
or
to adjust the minutes.

● If the displayed minutes before the reset are
in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed
before the reset will advance by one hour
and the minutes will be reset to :00.
For example, if the MENU button and the
TUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the time
displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display
will be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressed
while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the
display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time the
display will return to the audio.

FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button:

6. Press the MENU button again to exit the
clock set mode.

Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→
FM reception.

The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button
again to return to the regular clock display.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.

Resetting the time
Hold the MENU button down and then press the
TUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as follows:
● If the displayed minutes before the reset are
in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayed
before the reset will stay the same and the
minutes will be reset to :00.

TUNE buttons:
Manual tuning
Press the TUNE
or
button for less
than 0.5 seconds for manual tuning.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

To move quickly through the channels, press and
hold either TUNE
or
button down
for more than 1.5 seconds.
SEEK buttons:
SEEK tuning
Press the SEEK
or
button to seek
through the frequencies. Seek tuning begins
from low to high frequencies, or high to low
frequencies, depending on which button is
pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting station. Once the highest broadcasting station is
reached, the radio continues in the seek mode at
the lowest broadcasting station.
Station memory operations:
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to
the A, B and C preset button in any combination
of AM or FM stations.
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change
between storage banks. The radio displays
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of
presets are active.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,
and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot
with the label side up. The compact disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
TUNE (rewind and fast
forward) buttons:
When the TUNE
or
button is
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
compact disc plays at an increased speed while

rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play
speed.
SEEK buttons:
is pressed while the compact disc
When
is playing, the next track following the present
one starts to play from the beginning.
Press
several times to skip several tracks.
Each time the button is pressed, the CD advances 1 additional track. The track number appears in the display window. (When the last track
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
played.)
When
is pressed, the track being played
returns to the beginning. Press
several
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed, the CD moves back one track.
SEEK (Scan CDs) button:
Press and hold the SEEK
button for more
than 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10
seconds of a track on the compact disc. The
SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEK
or
button is pressed during the scan
mode.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
1 ←→ Normal
1: The track that is currently playing will be repeated.

CD EJECT button:
When the
button is pressed with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.

CD IN indicator:
CD IN indicator appears on the display when the
CD is loaded with the system on.

When the
button is pressed while the
compact disc is being played, the compact disc
will eject and the system will turn off.

RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
RDM ←→ Normal
RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently playing will be played randomly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0944

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

RADIO AM·FM button*
PRESET A·B·C button
RPT button
speaker control button
RDM button
PAUSE·MUTE button

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

REAR CTRL button
SCAN button
TRACK button
SEEK/CAT button
TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob
CD load button

13. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons
CD eject button
14.
15. VOL/ON·OFF control knob
16. DISC·AUX button

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if
so equipped)

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as
follows:

For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this section.

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears
in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust
Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also
use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance
modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between
the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts
the sound between the right and left speakers.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XMT satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then
push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob while the
system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)
which was playing immediately before the system
was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance):

Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.

LHA0927

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press
the SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” key
using the NISSAN controller, then press the ENTER button; the audio settings screen will be
displayed. Select the “–” key or “+” key, then
press the ENTER button to change the SSV.
While in this screen you can also adjust the other
audio settings by selecting the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the BACK button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

While in this screen, you can also adjust the other
audio settings by selecting the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the BACK button.
For information on how to use the NISSAN controller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”
earlier in this section.
Clock set
For setting the clock, see “Clock” earlier in this
section.
WHA0941

For information on how to use the NISSAN controller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”
earlier in this section.

WHA0928

Precision phased audio (if so equipped):
To turn on or off the precision phased audio,
press the SETTING button. Select the “Audio”
key using the NISSAN controller, then press the
ENTER button, the audio settings screen will be
displayed. Select the “Precision Phased Audio”
key, then press the ENTER button. If the amber
indicator light is displayed the precision phased
audio is enabled. Pressing the ENTER button
again will turn off the precision phased audio, the
indicator light will disappear.
When this item is turned on, super high pitch
sound and super low pitch sound are emphasized and midrange sound is played naturally.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

PAUSE·MUTE button:
To mute or pause the audio sound, press the
PAUSE·MUTE button.
Press the PAUSE·MUTE button again to resume
the audio sound.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM/SAT band select:
Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will change
the band as follows:
AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)
WHA0946

CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD
certain text might be able to be displayed (when
CD encoded with text is being used).
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is
encoded the following text might be able to be
displayed by selecting the “Text” key using the
NISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER button:
● Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
● File displays the name of the file currently
playing.

● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.

When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last played.

● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.

The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.

WHA0947

● Disc displays the disc name of the CD currently playing.
● Track displays the name of the song on the
CD currently playing.
Some of this text or modes might not display
while playing a regular CD. Press the BACK
button to exit the CD text display screen.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
AM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will come on.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:
To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR
knob to the right or left.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
tuning buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT
button or the
TRACK
button for less than 1.5 seconds
to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
SCAN button again during this 5 second period
will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to
the next station.
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory operations):
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or
SAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the
PRESET A·B·C select button.

● Music or programming type such as “Classical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station
band.

● Artist and song information.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
4. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Radio data system (RDS):
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
RDS can display:
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
and press the
button, then press one of
the CD insert (1–6) slots. Insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side facing up. The
compact disc will be guided automatically into
the slot and start playing.
If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.
If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
disc.
button:
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press
the
button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert
select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press and
hold the
button for more than 1.5 seconds.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

The NISSAN controller can also be used to select tracks when a CD is being played.

DISC·AUX button:

SEEK/CAT and TRACK (Rewind·Fast Forward) buttons:

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will start
to play.
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
compact disc loaded with the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:
When the SEEK/CAT
button is pressed
while a compact disc is playing, the track being
played returns to its beginning. Press several
times to skip back through tracks. The compact
disc will go back the number of times the button
is pressed.
When the TRACK
button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track will
start to play from its beginning. Press several
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc
will advance the number of times the button is
pressed. (When the last track on the compact
disc is skipped through, the first track will be
played.)

(rewind)
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT
button or the TRACK
(fast forward) button
while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRK RPT →
ALL DISC RPT
MP3/WMA CD:
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER
RPT → 1 TRK RPT → ALL DISC RPT

When the CD button is pressed with the compact disc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned
off and the compact disc will start to play.

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will
be repeated.
1 TRK RPT: The track that is currently playing will
be repeated
1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently being
accessed will be repeated.

TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob

RDM button:

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the
TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or
backward through available folders.

When the RDM button is pressed while the compact disc is played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:

CD select buttons:

CD:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press a
CD select button (1 – 6).

ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → ALL DISC MIX

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MP3/WMA CD:
ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → 1 FOLDER MIX
→ ALL DISC MIX
ALL DISC MIX: All discs loaded will be played in
a mixed order.
1 DISC MIX: The tracks on the disc that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order.
1 FOLDER MIX: The tracks in the folder that is
currently being accessed will be played in a
mixed order.
SCAN button:
While listening to a CD, press the SCAN button
to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on
the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again
during this 10 second period stops the scan and
the CD remains on that track.
REAR CTRL:
Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear
seat audio controller on. Rear Controls UNLOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRL
button again to turn the rear seat audio controller
off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If the
vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio
controller, the display will show “Rear Controls
Not Available”.

Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for approximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear display screen. Rear Display ON will display. Press
and hold the REAR CTRL button again will turn
the rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF will
display. If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear
display screen, the display will show “Rear Controls Not Available”.
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:
Press the
button to turn the rear speakers
off and headphones on. Press this button again
to turn rear seat speakers back on and headphones off.
CD EJECT:

All discs:
button for more
● Press and hold the
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
button is
within 15 seconds, or the
pressed again during the eject sequence,
the entire disc eject sequence will be canceled.
When this button is pressed while the compact
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
and the last source will be played.
CD IN indicator:
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
only.

Current/Selected disc:
● Press the
button, then press the slot
number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The
compact disc will be ejected. If no slot number (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded
disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc
is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc
will reload.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA1017

AUX jack (if so equipped)
1 is located below the air condiThe AUX jack s
tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts
any standard analog audio input, such as from a
portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or
laptop computers.

Press the DISC·AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WHA0945

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

PRESET A·B·C button
DISC/AUX button
speaker control button
REAR CTRL button
SCAN·RPT button
TRACK button

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

SEEK/CAT button
TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob
CompactFlash insert slot
Station select (1 - 6) buttons
CD eject button
VOL/ON·OFF control knob

13. AM·FM/SAT button*
14. MUSIC BOX button

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

*When the AM·FM/SAT button is
pressed, the satellite radio mode will be
skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an
XMT satellite radio service subscription
is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so
equipped)

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as
follows:

For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this section.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance):

Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance

LHA0884

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
To change the SSV mode from OFF (0) to 5,
press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Audio” key, the audio settings screen will be displayed. Touch the “–” key or “+” key, to change
the SSV.
While in this screen you can also adjust the other
audio settings by touching the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, touch the “BACK” key.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

While in this screen, you can also adjust the other
audio settings by touching the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, touch the “BACK” key.
Clock set
For setting the clock, see “Clock” earlier in this
section.

LHA0900

WHA0942

Precision phased audio (if so equipped):
To turn on or off the precision phased audio,
press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Audio” key; the audio settings screen will be displayed. Touch the “Precision Phased Audio ON”
key. If the amber indicator light is displayed, the
precision phased audio is enabled. Touching the
“Precision Phased Audio ON” key again will turn
off the precision phased audio; the indicator light
will disappear.
When this item is turned on, super high pitch
sound and super low pitch sound are emphasized and midrange sound is played naturally.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM/SAT band select:
Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will change
the band as follows:
AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)
When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
WHA0949

CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD
certain text might be able to be displayed (when
CD encoded with text is being used).
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is
encoded the following text might be able to be
displayed by touching the “Text” key:
● Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
● File displays the name of the file currently
playing.

WHA0950

● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.
● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.
● Disc displays the disc name of the CD currently playing.
● Track displays the name of the song on the
CD currently playing.
Some of this text or modes might not display
while playing a regular CD. Press the BACK
button to exit the CD text display screen.

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, the
satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XMT satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
AM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will come on.
The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
from stereo to monaural reception.

● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:
To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR
knob to the right or left.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
tuning buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT
button or the
TRACK
button for less than 1.5 seconds
to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN·RPT (SCAN tuning) button:
Press the SCAN·RPT button to initiate scan tuning. Scan tuning will stop at each broadcasting
station for 5 seconds. Press the SCAN·RPT button again during this 5 second period to stop
scan tuning; the radio will remain tuned to that
station. If the SCAN·RPT button is not pressed
within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next
station.
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory operations):
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or
SAT stations.
1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the
PRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station
band.
3. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
4. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Radio data system (RDS):
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
RDS can display:
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
● Music or programming type such as “Classical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
label side facing up. The compact disc will be
guided automatically into the slot and start playing.
If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.
If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
disc.
DISC/AUX button:
When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will start
to play.
When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:
When the SEEK/CAT
button is pressed
while a compact disc is playing, the track being
played returns to its beginning. Press several
times to skip back through tracks. The compact
disc will go back the number of times the button
is pressed.
When the TRACK
button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track will
start to play from its beginning. Press several
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc
will advance the number of times the button is
pressed. (When the last track on the compact
disc is skipped through, the first track will be
played.)

When the CD button is pressed with the compact disc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be turned
off and the compact disc will start to play.
TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob
While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the
TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or
backward through available folders.
SCAN·RPT (random and repeat) button:
When the SCAN·RPT button is pressed while the
compact disc is being played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:

The NISSAN controller can also be used to select tracks when a CD is being played.

1 DISC RPT → 1 TRK RPT → 1 DISC RDM → 1
DISC RPT

SEEK/CAT and TRACK (Rewind·Fast Forward) buttons:

MP3/WMA CD:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT
(rewind)
button or the TRACK
(fast forward) button
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

REAR CTRL:
Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear
seat audio controller on. Rear Controls UNLOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRL
button again will turn the rear seat audio controller off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If the
vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio
controller, the display will show “Rear Controls
Not Available”.
Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for approximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear display screen on. Rear Display ON will display.
Press and hold the REAR CTRL button again will
turn the rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF
will display. If the vehicle is not equipped with a
rear display screen, the display will show “Rear
Controls Not Available”.
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT →
1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → 1 DISC RPT
1 DISC RPT: the entire disc will be repeated.
1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be
repeated.
1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly.
1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being accessed will be repeated.
1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folder
being accessed will be played randomly.

Press the
button to turn the rear speakers
off and headphones on. Press this button again
to turn rear seat speakers back on and headphones off.
CD EJECT button:
When the
button is pressed with the compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

When
button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.

LHA1017

Press the DISC/AUX button to play a compatible
device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

LHA1018

COMPACTFLASH™ (CF) PLAYER
OPERATION (if so equipped)
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON posi1 into the Compacttion, and insert a CF card s
2 . Then press the DISC/AUX
Flash™ player slot s
button repeatedly to switch to the CompactFlash™ mode.
If the system has been turned off while the CompactFlash™ card was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the CompactFlash™ card.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

DISC/AUX button:
When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the CF card inserted, the system
will turn on. If another audio source is playing and
a CF card is inserted, press the DISC/AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to
the CompactFlash™ mode.

WHA0953

CF display mode
While listening to CF certain text might be able to
be displayed.
Depending on how the files are encoded on the
CF the following text might be able to be displayed by touching the “Text” key:

WHA0954

● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.
● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.
Press the BACK button to exit the CF text display
screen.

● Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
● File displays the name of the file currently
playing.
● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

SCAN·RPT button:

Press the
SEEK/CAT button or the
TRACK button while the CF card is being played,
the next track or the beginning of the current track
on the CF will be played.

Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while the CF
card is playing, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:

Press and hold the
SEEK/CAT (rewind)
button or the
TRACK (fast forward) button
for more than approximately 1.5 seconds, the CF
card will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.
When the
SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or
the
TRACK (fast forward) button is released, the CF card will return to the normal
playing speed.
The NISSAN controller can also be used to select tracks when the CF card is being played.
For more information on how to use the NISSAN
controller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller” earlier in this section.
Folder selection:
To change to another folder in the CF card either:
● Turn the TUNE/FLDR knob right or left.
● Touch the desired folder key on screen.
● Use the NISSAN controller.

1 CF CARD RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK
RPT → 1 CF CARD RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM →
1 CF CARD RPT
1 CF CARD RPT: the entire CF card will be
repeated.
1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being accessed will be repeated.
1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be
repeated.
1 CF CARD RDM: all the tracks on the CF card
will be played randomly.
1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folder
being accessed will be played randomly.

CF eject:
Press the knob next to the CF slot while a CF
card is inserted, the CF card will be ejected.

Troubleshooting messages:
The following messages will be displayed under
certain conditions:
● Reading CompactFlash™
The system is reading the CF card inserted
in the slot.

● No CompactFlash™ card
A CF card is not inserted in the slot.
● CompactFlash™ read error
The system cannot read the CF card.
● Unplayable file
The system cannot play a music file.
● No audio file
The CF card inserted in the slot or its folder
does not contain any music files.
Compatibility with other media:
If a commercially available CompactFlash™
adapter is inserted into the slot, other memory
media can also be used.

MUSIC BOX HARD-DISK DRIVE
AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Music Box hard-disk drive audio system can
store songs from CDs being played. The system
has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and
can record up to 200 hours (approximately 2,900
songs).
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music
Box hard-disk drive audio system:
● CDs without MP3/WMA files.
● Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) specification in CD-Extras.
● First session of multisession disc.
Extreme temperature conditions [below 24°F
(220°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect
the performance of the hard disk.
NOTE:
If the hard disk needs to be replaced due to
a malfunction, all stored music data will be
erased.
WHA0955

Recording songs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.
For information on playing CDs, see “Compact Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in
this section.
2. Touch the “REC” key.
The system starts recording the track being
played and REC CD appears on the screen.
If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard-disk drive or in the CD,
the title is automatically displayed on the screen.
For title acquisition from the hard-disk drive, mu-

WHA0956

sic recognition technology and related data are
provided by GracenoteT.
To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”
key on the screen or use the NISSAN controller
and press the ENTER button. The track name and
album title are displayed on the screen.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
symbol is displayed
skipping sounds, the
behind the track number.
The Music Box audio system cannot perform
recording under the following conditions:
● There is not enough space in the hard disk.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 500.

Stopping playback:
The system stops playing when:

● The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 3,000.

● Another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash™
or AUX) is selected.

Automatic recording:

● The audio system is turned off.

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For
more information, see “Music Box settings” later
in this section.

● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

Stopping recording:
To stop the recording, touch the “STOP” key on
the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio system
is turned off or the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position, the recording also stops.

WHA0957

Playing recorded songs
Select the Music Box audio system by using one
of the following methods:
● Press the mode select switch on the steering wheel.
For information, see “Steering wheel switch
for audio control” later in this section.
● Press the MUSIC BOX button.
● Give voice commands.
For information, see “NISSAN voice recognition system” later in this section.

SEEK/CAT button or the
Press the
TRACK button while a track is being played; the
next track or the beginning of the current track will
be played.
Press and hold the
SEEK/CAT (rewind)
button or the
TRACK (fast forward) button
for more than approximately 1.5 seconds; the
track will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.
When the
SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or
the
TRACK (fast forward) button is released, the track will return to the normal playing
speed.
The NISSAN controller can also be used to select tracks.
For more information on how to use the NISSAN
controller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller” earlier in this section.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SCAN·RPT button:
Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while a track is
playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:
ALL Playlist RPT → 1 Playlist RPT → 1 TRK RPT
→ ALL Playlist RDM → 1 Playlist RDM → ALL
Playlist RPT
ALL Playlist RPT: the entire playlist will be repeated.
1 Playlist RPT: the playlist currently being played
will be repeated.
1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will be
repeated.
ALL Playlist RDM: all the tracks in the playlist will
be played randomly.
1 Playlist RDM: the tracks in the current playlist
will be played randomly.

LHA0958

Music Box menu
There are some options available during playback. Touch the “Menu” key, then select one of
the following that are displayed on the screen, if
necessary. Refer to the following information for
each item:
● Play by Artist
Plays songs by an artist whose music is
currently being played. The artists are sorted
in alphabetical order.
● Play by Album
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are
sorted in alphabetical order.

LHA0959

● Play by Date
Plays tracks in each album. The albums are
sorted in order of the date when they were
stored in the system.
● Play by Mood
Plays music from one of the following
moods:
– Relaxing Music
– Lively Music
– Slow Music
– Upbeat Music

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Search Song Details
Set the conditions and touch the “Start
Song Search” key to search for a desired
song that is stored in the system. The conditions are as follows:

● Play by Category
Plays music from one of the following categories:
– My Favorites
– Hit Songs

– Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)

– Kids’ Songs

– Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s, ’10s
and After)

– Rarely Played
● Search Artists
Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order.
Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks
by the artist and starts playing the first track.

– Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist,
Group and Duo)

LHA0960

● Search Albums
Displays a list of albums in order of the date
when they were stored in the system. Selecting an album displays all of the tracks on
the album and starts playing the first track.
Touch the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in one
of the following order:
– Rec. (Recorded) Date

– Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B,
Hip Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae,
Folk, Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World, Classical, Children’s and
Other)
● Search Keywords
Input a search keyword using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
For information, see “How to use the touch
screen” earlier in this section.
● Edit Albums
Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,
Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit
the details using the keypad displayed on
the screen.
For information, see “How to use the touch
screen” earlier in this section.

– Name
– Release Year
– Artist

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Music Box System Info.
Displays the following information about the
Music Box audio system:
– Music Box Used / Free Space
Information about Saved Album, Saved
Track and Remaining Time is displayed.
– Mood Categories
Number of saved tracks and their categories Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow
Music, Upbeat Music and Others are displayed.

● Transfer Missing Titles to CF
Transfers the information of the album
recorded without titles to a CompactFlash™ card.
– Music Box Settings
For information, see “Music Box settings”
later in this section.
– CDDB Version
The version of the built-in GracenoteT
Database is displayed.

– Deleted Items
Information about the deleted tracks is
displayed.
– Search Missing Titles
If titles are not displayed for CDs that
have been recorded, titles can be acquired using one of the following methods:
● Retrieve from HDD
Searches the title using the database in
the hard-disk.
● Retrieve from CF
Searches the title from the information
acquired on the Internet.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Edit Info.
Edit the name of the track being played and
its artist using the keypad displayed on the
screen.
For information, see “How to use the touch
screen” earlier in this section.
The category of the track can also be set to
Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop,
Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,
Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,
Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,
Classical, Children’s and Others.

LHA0961

● Remove Track
Reset the mood setting of a track.

LHA0962

Music Box text display:

Restoring deleted data

While listening to a track in the Music Box audio
system you can view certain text. Touch the “Text”
key to display the following information for each
item:

Deleted music data can be restored by performing the following:
1. Touch the “Menu” key and then the touch the
“Music Box System Info.” key on the screen.

● Set Mood
Set the mood category of the track to “Relaxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music”
or “Upbeat Music”.

2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the
“Album/Track” key.
3. Touch the “Restore Album/Track” key to restore the deleted music data.

● Delete Track
Delete the track being played.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0964

You can also listen to the beginning of each track
that has been deleted by performing the following:
1. Touch the “Menu” key and then the “Music
Box System Info.” key on the screen.
2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the
“Play Sample” key.

LHA0965

LHA0962

Music Box settings
To set up the Music Box hard-disk drive audio
system to your preferred settings, touch the
“Menu” key during playback, then touch the “Music Box System Info.” key, and then the “Music
Box Settings” key.
● Automatic Recording:
When this item is turned to ON, the Music
Box hard-disk audio system automatically
starts recording when a CD is inserted.
● Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

GracenoteT
NOTE:
● The information contained in the
GracenoteT Database is not fully guaranteed.
● The service of the GracenoteT Database on
the Internet may be stopped without prior
notice for maintenance.
End-User License Agreement
LHA0963

● Title Text Priority:
Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc
Data Base) to acquire track information from
the GracenoteT Database or set to CD
TEXT to acquire the information from CDs.
● Delete ALL Music Box Data:
Delete all music data stored on the hard disk.

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
GracenoteT MusicID™ Terms of Use
This device contains software from Gracenote,
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to do online disc
identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of this
device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for

your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE
DATA,
THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates,
you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any
information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID service to count queries without knowing anything
about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote MusicID Service.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with
new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its online services at
any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.

Copyright:
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by GracenoteT. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2006 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2006 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680;
#6,154,773,
#6,161,132,
#6,230,192,
#6,230,207,
#6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

LHA0049

CD/CF (CompactFlash™) CARE AND
CLEANING
CD:
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.

● Do not store the cards in highly humid locations.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

● Do not spill any liquids on the cards.

● Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.
Refer to the CompactFlash™ card Owner’s
Manual for more details.

LHA1002

CF cards:

CAUTION
Do not force the CompactFlash™ card into
the CompactFlash™ player slot. Forcing
the CF card could damage the pins inside
the CF player slot, especially if the CF card
is upside down or backwards.
● Never touch the terminal portion of the CompactFlash™ cards. Do not bend the cards.
● Always place the cards in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● Do not place heavy objects on the cards.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition key
turned to the ACC or ON position push the
MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch
Push the mode select switch to change the mode
in the following sequence: PRESET A → PRESET B → PRESET C → Music Box** (if so
equipped) → CD* → CompactFlash™* (if so
equipped) → DVD* (if so equipped) → AUX***.
*These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device.
WHA0611

WHA0612

Type A

1.
2.
3.
4.

Volume control switch
MODE select switch
POWER on/off switch
Tuning switch

Type B

1.
2.
3.
4.

Volume control switch
Phone operation switch
POWER on and MODE select switch
Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch
With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON
position, push the POWER switch to turn the
audio system on or off.

**This mode is only available when music has
been downloaded into the Music Box hard-disk
drive audio system.
***This mode is only available when a compatible
auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch up or down to
increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning
Memory change (radio):
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
B or C), push the tuning switch
or
for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next
preset station in memory.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Seek tuning (radio):

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the tuning switch
or
for more
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
radio station.

or
for more
Push the tuning switch
than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up
or down.

Next/Previous track (CD/CF):
Push the tuning switch
or
for less
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a blank interval within
1 program or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or
expected location.

LHA1062

1. Infrared transmitter lens*
2. Rear display screen
*Red transmitters will be visible when infrared headphones are on.

Next/Previous track (Music Box):
Push the tuning switch
or
for less
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

REMOTE AUDIO SYSTEM
CONTROLS (if so equipped)
Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radio
control panel to allow the remote controller to
control some audio system functions. Press the
REAR CTRL button again to allow the audio
system to be controlled by only the front controls.

Push and hold the tuning switch
or
for more than 1.5 seconds to change playlists.
When the last playlist is playing, the next playlist
will be selected.

Press the
button on the front radio control
panel; the headphones symbol and the message

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

“Headphones ON” illuminates on the front display when the headphones are on.
One or two infrared headphones and one remote
controller are included if the vehicle is equipped
with the DVD entertainment system.
For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radio
with compact disc player, if the rear headphones
are turned on, the rear speakers will be disabled.
The rear passengers can use the wireless headphones to listen to a different media than the front
passengers. The rear passengers can listen to
the same media along with the front passengers
or they can listen to a different media.
For more information on the remote controller,
see “NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System
(MES)” later in this section.

VOL (volume) wireless headphones
dial:
The VOL dial on the wireless headphones allows
the rear passengers to adjust the headphone
volume level.
Speaker control (front panel)
button:
Press the
button on the front radio control
panel to turn the rear speakers off and the wire-

button
less headphones on. Press the
again to turn rear speakers back on and wireless
headphones off.

MODE (remote control) button:
The MODE button on the remote controller allows the rear passengers to change between
Preset A, Preset B, Preset C, Music Box**, CD*,
CompactFlash*, DVD* and AUX. When a source
of media is selected, the media type will be displayed on the rear screen.
*These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device.
**This mode is only available when music has
been downloaded into the Music Box hard-disk
drive audio system.
Seek (remote control)
buttons:
In AM or FM mode, the
or the
seek
buttons on the remote controller allow the rear
seat passengers to find the next or previous
preset radio station.
In CD, Music Box hard-disk drive audio system
or
and CompactFlash™ mode, the
the
seek buttons allow the rear passengers to find the next or previous selection.

REW and FF (remote
control) buttons:
When the
(rewind) or the
(fast forward) button on the remote controller is pressed
while in AM or FM mode, the radio will tune to the
next frequency.
When the
(rewind) or the
(fast forward) button on the remote controller is pressed
while in CD, Music Box hard-disk audio system,
or CompactFlash™, the media will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.

ANTENNA
Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
passenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION
● Do not place metalized film near the
rear driver or passenger side window
glass or attach any metal parts to it. This
may cause poor reception or noise.
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
driver or passenger side window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the
window antenna. Lightly wipe along the
antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)
● Do not attempt to modify the system to
display a movie on the front screen
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing
so may distract the driver and may
cause a collision and serious personal
injury or death.

is played. To view movies in the front display, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift
selector lever to the P (Park) position and apply
the parking brake.

CAUTION

LHA1019

This vehicle is equipped with the mobile entertainment system, which enables you to play a
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the images and sounds both in the front and rear display screens.

WARNING
● The driver must not attempt to operate
or view the Mobile Entertainment System while the vehicle is in motion so
that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mercury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning
the Mobile Entertainment System components. Do not use solvents or cleaning solutions.
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
above 158°F (70°C)].
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do not
operate the system more than 15 minutes without
starting the engine.
Movies will not be shown on the front display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce
driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

3. Auxiliary input jack:
For information, see “DVD auxiliary input
jacks” later in this section.

WHA0967

1.
2.
3.

EJECT button
DVD slot
Auxiliary input jack

DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER
CONTROLS

EJECT button:
When the
button is pressed with the
DVD loaded, it will be ejected.
The display will show the eject symbol in the
upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds
once the
button is pressed.
If the DVD is not loaded, the display will
show “NO DISC”.
If the DVD comes out and is not removed
within 25 seconds, it will be pulled back into
the slot to protect it.

2. DVD slot:
Insert a DVD into the slot with the label side
facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

DISPLAY button
MODE button
SUBTITLE button
AUDIO button
ANGLE button
CLEAR button
PAUSE button
PLAY button
FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE
button
MENU button
NAVIGATION keys
BACK button
NUMERIC KEYPAD

REMOTE CONTROL
Refer to “Remote control operation” later in this
section for the function of each button.

LHA0315

FLIP-DOWN SCREEN
The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con1 located at the bottom of the
trol receiver s
screen.

CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mercury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.

LHA0317

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

POWER button
STOP button
NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVIOUS TRACK/CHAPTER button
TITLE button
ENTER button

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● The screen rotates down to view and up
into the housing to store when not in
use. Ensure that the screen is latched
securely into the housing when stored.

SAA0720

SAA0721

Headphones

NOTE:

Power ON/OFF:

For optimum infrared headphone performance, increase the volume on the rear
seat controller to the maximum level and
adjust the infrared headphone volume using the volume control on the headphones.
Using a lower volume setting on the rear
seat controller can cause static noise in the
infrared headphones.

Press the power button to turn the headphones
on or off.
Volume control:
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the volume.
The headphones will automatically be turned off
in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that
period. To prevent the battery from being discharged, keep the power supply turned off when
not in use.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD
MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Precautions
Start the engine when using the DVD entertainment system.

WARNING
The driver must not attempt to operate the
DVD System or wear the headphones
while the vehicle is in motion so that full
attention may be given to vehicle
operation.

CAUTION
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
battery.
● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liquids may cause the system to
malfunction.
While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD player
does not guarantee complete functionality of all
VIDEO-CD formats.

Copyright and trademark
● The technology protected by the U.S. patent
and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other right
holders is adopted for this system.
● This copyright protected technology cannot
be used without a permit from Macrovision
Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,
etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision
Corporation is not issued.
● Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.
● Dolby digital is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

Disc selection
You can play the following disc formats with the
DVD drive:
● DVD-VIDEO
● VIDEO-CD
● CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD
with MP3/WMA cannot be played.)
Use DVDs with a region code 1, ALL or 1 included for your DVD entertainment system. The
region code is displayed as a small symbol
printed on the top of the DVD. This vehicleinstalled DVD player cannot play DVDs with a
region code other than 1 or ALL.

● Dolby and the double D mark are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
● DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,
Inc.

Parental level (parental control)
DVDs with the parental control setting can be
played with this system. Please use your own
judgement to set the parental control with the
system.

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Rear display:
To adjust the rear display mode, press the DISP
(Display) button on the remote controller.
To adjust the display brightness, tint, color and
contrast, select each key using the joystick on the
remote controller and tilt the joystick to right or
left.
Press the BACK button to apply the settings and
return to the previous display

WHA0968

Display settings
Front display:
To adjust the front display mode, press the SETTING button while the DVD is being played,
select the “Display” key with the NISSAN controller, and then press the ENTER button. To adjust
the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint, color, contrast and black level select each key using the
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.
Then you can adjust each item using the NISSAN
controller. After changes have been made press
the BACK button to save the settings.

LHA0972

PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE
DISC (DVD)
With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,
video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passengers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound independently of the front seat.
Press the DISC/AUX button located on the front
controls to hear the sound of the DVD play
through the speakers.
Press the REAR CTRL button located on the
front controls to disable or enable rear seat audio
controls. For more information on rear seat audio
controls see, “Rear Audio Controls” earlier in this
section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Pressing the
button on the front controls
turns the rear speakers on or off and enables or
disables the wireless headphones .
It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote
control.
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables
are necessary. You can use them in almost all the
ranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to use
the headphones in the front seat.)

DISC/AUX button
Park the vehicle in a safe location and
apply the parking brake for the front seat
occupants to operate the DVD drive while
watching the images.
Press the DISC/AUX button on the instrument
panel and turn the display to the DVD mode.
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed automatically.
The operation screen will be turned on when the
DISC/AUX button located on the instrument
panel is pressed while a DVD is being played,
and it will turn off automatically after a period of
time. To turn it on again, press the DISC/AUX
button once more.

DVD operation keys
To operate the DVD drive, touch the preferred key
(if so equipped) or select the preferred key displayed on the operation screen using the
NISSAN controller.
NOTE:
If the display in your vehicle is not touch
screen enabled; use the NISSAN controller
and the ENTER button to operate the following functions. For more information on
how to operate the NISSAN controller, see
“How to use the NISSAN controller” earlier
in this section.
PAUSE key:
Touch the “
” PAUSE key to pause the DVD.
To resume playing the DVD, touch the
“
”PLAY key.
To pause the DVD, it is also possible to press
button on the keypad of the remote
the
controller.
PLAY key:

To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to
button on the keypad of the
press the
remote controller.
STOP key:
Touch the “
DVD.

” STOP key to stop playing the

To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to
press the
button on the keypad of the
remote controller.
SKIP (forward) key:
Touch the “
” SKIP key to skip the chapter(
s) of the disc forward. The chapters will advance
the number of times the “
” SKIP key is
touched.
Touch and hold the “
” SKIP key for more
than 1.5 seconds to fast forward the disc. When
the “
” SKIP key is released the disc will be
played normally.
To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible
button on the keypad of the
to press the
remote controller.

Touch the “
” PLAY key to start playing the
DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SKIP (rewind) key:
Touch the “
” SKIP key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc backward. The chapters will go back
the number of times the “
” SKIP key is
touched.
Touch and hold the “
” SKIP key for more
than 1.5 seconds to rewind the disc. When the
“
” SKIP key is released the disc will be
played normally.
To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also possible to press the
button on the keypad of
the remote controller.
LHA0969

LHA0970

DVD settings
Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings while playing a DVD.
When all the changes have been made, press
BACK button to save all the settings.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Switch to DVD-AUX:

Angle:

Switch the output source from the DVD drive to
another device connected to the auxiliary input
jacks located on the DVD player.

If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle can be
switched to another one.

For more information, see “DVD auxiliary input
jacks” later in this section.

Choose a different angle by touching the “–” key
or the “+” key; the angle will change if available.

Menu:

Angle Mark:

Some menus specific to each DVD will be
shown. For details, see the instructions attached
to the DVD.

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be
shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene
can be seen from a different angle. Touch the
“ON” key to enable the angle mark; the indicator
light will illuminate.

Top Menu:
LHA0971

Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For
details, see the instructions attached to the DVD.
Audio:
Some audio tracks specific to each DVD will be
shown. For details, see the instructions attached
to the DVD.
Subtitle:

10Key Search:
Touch the “10Key Search” key to open the number entry screen. Input the number you want to
search for and touch the “OK” key. The specified
Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.
Title Search:

Choose the preferred DVD subtitle language by
touching the “
” key or the “
” key.

The scene with the specified title will be displayed the number of times the “–” key or the “+”
key is touched.

Display Mode:

Menu Skip:

Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or the Cinema mode by touching the “
” key or the
“
” key.

DVD menus are automatically configured and the
contents will be played directly when the “Menu

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Skip” key is turned on. Note that some discs may
not be played directly even if this item is turned
on.
DVD Language:
Touch the “DVD Language” key to open the number entry screen. Input the number corresponding to the preferred language and touch the “OK”
key. The DVD top menu language will be
changed to the one specified.

Before connecting a device to a jack, power off
the portable device and turn off the DVD player.
To view something connected to the auxiliary
input jacks, press the DISC/AUX button until the
DVD mode appears, then touch the “Settings”
key. Then touch the “Switch to DVD-AUX” key.
The screen will change to the DVD-AUX mode.

DRC:
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you
to tune the dynamic range of the sound recorded
in the DolbyT Digital format. Touch the “–” key or
the “+” key to tune the DRC.

Auxiliary input jacks
The auxiliary input jacks are located on the front of
the DVD player which is located inside the center
console. NTSC and PAL compatible devices
such as video games, camcorders and portable
video players can be connected to the auxiliary
jacks.
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identification purposes.
● Yellow - video input
● White - left channel audio input
● Red - right channel audio input

LHA0973

DVD-AUX settings
Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
● Switch to DVD:
Touch this key to switch back to the DVD mode.
● Video Format:
If the auxiliary source is in a different video
format, touch the “
” key or the “
”
key, the video format will change.
● Display Mode:
Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cin” key or
ema mode by touching the “
the “
” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION

MODE select button:

For all operation precautions, see “Before operating the DVD Mobile Entertainment System”
earlier in this section.

Press the MODE button to select Audio/Video
source between DVD and AUX input (input jacks
on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,
White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =
Video input).

The DVD system can also be controlled by using
the remote controller in the rear seats. See the
following items.
PWR on/off button:
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ON
position, press the PWR button to turn the DVD
rear display on or off.
LHA0974

When all the changes have been made, press the
BACK button to save all the settings.

The display will show the “AUX” in the upper left
corner of the display for 4 seconds once the
Mode is changed to AUX.
To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary input
jacks” in this section.
PLAY:

NOTE:
The PWR button on the remote control only
turns the rear display on or off.
Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side
facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically
into the slot.
If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, the
DVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION
Do not force the compact disc into the
slot. This could damage the player.

When the
PLAY button on the remote
control is pressed, the player will play.
In play mode, the display will briefly show
on the upper left corner of the display.
FF (Fast Forward), REW:
(fast forward) /
(Rewind) butPress
tons to carry out the fast forward or rewind presentation at 5 times normal play speed.
Press
(fast forward) /
(Rewind) buttons again or PLAY button to resume the normal
play speed.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

NEXT CHAPTER/
PREVIOUS CHAPTER:
When the
(NEXT CHAPTER) button is
pressed while the DVD is being played, the program next to the present one will start to play from
its beginning. Press several times to skip through
programs. The DVD will advance the number of
times the button is pressed. When the
(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, the
program being played returns to its beginning.
Press several times to skip back through programs. The DVD will go back the number of times
the button is pressed.
PAUSE:
When the
PAUSE button on the remote
control is pressed, the player will pause playing of
the media. In pause mode, the player will
show
on the upper left corner of the display until the player is changed to another mode.
STOP:
Press the STOP button once to stop playing the
in the upper
media. The display will show
left corner of the display for 4 seconds, and the
last disc position will be stored. When the PLAY
button is pressed again, it will resume at the
stored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pressed again when the
player is already in Stop mode, it will reinitialize
the pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect it
will ignore the last stored disc position and upon
receipt of the next play message it will begin at
the Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”.
DISPLAY:
If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2
seconds, the display menu will appear on the
screen.
● The display menu will remain on the screen
for 10 seconds if no subsequent control
activations occur.
● Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within
the display menu, and use ENTER to select
the item.
NAVIGATION KEYS:

In the display menu, press the ENTER button to
select items for modification, as per the onscreen instructions.
MENU:
If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU
button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on
the screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigate
within the menu, and use ENTER to select the
item.
Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY
mode.
TITLE:
Press TITLE button to return the DVD media to
the “title” of the DVD.
Press TITLE button again to return to the previous
stop point and play.

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVIGATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,
Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

BACK:

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION
KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,
and Right within the menu.

SUBTITLE:

ENTER:
In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to select MENU items.

Press the BACK button to exit the current active
menu and return to the previous menu.
Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle
selection menu.
Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle
through each available subtitle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

AUDIO:
Press the AUDIO button to call up audio menu.
Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle
through each available audio track.
ANGLE:
Press the ANGLE button to call up camera angle
menu.
Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle
through each available angle.
CLEAR:
Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric
inputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the
3-second timer.
NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10):
Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access
disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their
numeric value.
The “≥10” button input numbers greater than or
equal to 10, allowing up three digits to be input
for selecting chapter/title/track number.

The chapter/title/track number will be automatically selected (if valid, based on media content) if
3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.
The operator can cancel the input
chapter/title/track number by actuating the
CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the
3-second timer.
These functions can be used only for the DVD
discs which correspond to them.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION
● Do not use any solvents or cleaning
solutions when cleaning the video
system.
● Do not use excessive force on the monitor screen.
● Avoid touching or scratching the monitor screen as it may become dirty or
damaged.

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the
surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment
System (DVD player face, screen, remote control,
etc.).
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
above 158°F (70°C)].
Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme
humidity conditions (less than 10% or more than
75%).

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will
continuously shift the previously input number to
the “left”.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● A new disc may be rough on its inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges using the side of a pen or pencil
as illustrated.
● Never attempt to use a DVD that has
been cracked, deformed, or repaired
using adhesive. Doing so may cause
damage to the equipment.
● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contamination or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not
be read properly.
LHA0049

HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD
CAUTION
● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
● Do not use a conventional record
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol intended for industrial use.

● Do not write, draw or attach anything on any
side of the DVD.
● Do not store the DVD in locations with direct
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.
● Always place discs in the storage case when
they are not being used.
● Do not put on any sticker or write anything
on either surface of the DVD.
LHA0484

DVD player operation precautions
Do not use the following DVDs as they may
cause the DVD player to malfunction:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● DVDs with a region code other than
A is displayed in
“1”. The region code s
a small symbol printed on the top of
B.
the DVD s

5. If the disc cannot be ejected see your
NISSAN dealer for further assistance.
6. Re-program the radio presets.

● DVDs that are not round.
● DVDs with a paper label.
● DVDs that are warped, scratched, or
have unequal edges.
● Recordable
(DVD+R).

digital

video

discs

● Rewritable
(DVD+RW).

digital

video

discs
LHA0318

Remote control and headphones
battery replacement

If a DVD with a paper label is used and
becomes jammed, you may be able to reset
the unit and eject the jammed disc with the
following procedure:

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Record the radio presets.

1. Open the lid.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal from
the battery for five minutes.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.
● Size AA (remote control)

3. Reconnect the negative battery terminal.

● Size AAA (headphones)
Make sure that the
and
ends on
the batteries match the markings inside the
compartment.

4. Check to see if the jammed DVD has
been ejected. If it has not, try to eject
the DVD by pushing the eject button.

3. Close the lid securely.

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
● When changing batteries, do not let dust or
oil get on the remote control and headphones.
FCC Notice:

SAA0723

If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, close the lid securely.
● If you will not be using the remote control for
long periods of time, remove the batteries.
● Replacement of the batteries is needed
when the remote control only functions at
extremely close distances to the DVD player
or not at all.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210
of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the
device.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.

WARNING
● A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.
● If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
● If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle before doing so.

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.
● An improperly disposed battery can harm
the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
CAUTION
● Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so, will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may
not charge completely. Refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section later in this manual.

WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle before
doing so.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

● Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

module when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned
on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different BluetoothT
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details, see
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” later in this
section.
Before using the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.

WHA0977

Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner
of a BluetoothT enabled cellular phone, you can
set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With BluetoothT wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is paired to the invehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone

● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, please refer to “Troubleshooting guide” later in this section. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
troubleshooting help.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.

● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Immediately after the ignition switch is
pushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROM
for the navigation system is inserted into the
player, it may be impossible to receive a call
for a short period of time.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
● While a cellular phone is connected through
the BluetoothT wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.

VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see 9NISSAN Voice Recognition
System9 later in this section.

● The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 8 inches (20
cm) between the radiator and your body. This
Transmitter must not be co-located or operating
in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0884

PAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Press the SETTING button, then select the
“Phone” key using the NISSAN controller
and press the ENTER button.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the list and select the
“Bluetooth Setup” key and press the ENTER
button.

LHA0978

LHA0979

3. Select the “Pair Phone” key and press the
ENTER button, then select one of the “None
(Add New)” keys by pressing the ENTER
button.

5. When the pairing is completed, the screen
will return to the BluetoothT setup display.

NOTE:
If pairing a phone for the first time, pressing the PHONE button twice will bring you
to the pair phone list.
4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
operate the BluetoothT cellular phone to
enter the PIN code. The pairing procedure of
the cellular phone varies according to each
cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular
phone owner’s manual for the details.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0980

LHA0981

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0982

LHA0978

LHA0983

LHA0984

Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the
phonebook.

4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key in
order to transfer a phonebook entry from
your cellular phone to your phonebook in
your car.

6. After the download is registered in the
phonebook, the system will ask if you want to
add a voice tag for it. The Voice Tag screen
will be displayed.
If you want to add a voice tag select the
“Yes” key and press the ENTER button. For
example, if the person’s name is David,
speak “David” while the Store voice tag
screen is on the display. The David voice tag
is stored in the phonebook. Voice tag is a
useful function for easy dialing supported by
the voice recognition system. For more information, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” later in this section.

PHONEBOOK

1. Press the SETTING button, then select the
“Phone” key and press the ENTER button.
2. Select the “Phonebook” key and press the
ENTER button.
3. Select one of the “None (Add New)” keys
from the name list of the phonebook and
press the ENTER button.

5. Operate the cellular phone to send a person’s name and phone number from the
memory of the cellular phone. The memory
sending procedure from the cellular phone
varies according to each cellular phone
manufacturer. See the cellular phone owner’s manual for more details.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:
Copy a phonebook from the BluetoothT cellular
phone. The availability of this function depends
on each cellular phone. The copying procedure
from the cellular phone also varies according to
each cellular phone. See the cellular phone owner’s manual for more details.
Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:
Store the name and phone number from the
outgoing call list.
Copy from Incoming Call Logs:
Store the name and phone number from the
incoming call list.
LHA0985

7. When the phonebook download is completed, the screen will return to the name list
of the phonebook.
There are different methods to input a phone
number. Select one of the following options instead of the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key in step 4
above.
Enter Data by Keypad:
Input the name and phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen. For information on how to use the touch screen, see
“How to use the touch screen” earlier in this
section..

Transfer via Bluetooth:
Transfer a contact from the BluetoothT cellular
phone. Availability of this function depends on
each cellular phone. The transferring procedure
from the cellular phone also varies according to
each cellular phone. See the cellular phone owner’s manual for more details.
Delete:
Delete a contact that is registered in the phonebook.

LHA0986

MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedures below.
1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
2. Touch the “Call (Phonebook)” key.
3. Touch one of the downloaded person’s key
from the list. Dialing will start.
4. After the call is over, perform one of the
following to finish the call.
a. Touch the “Hang Up” key.
b. Press and hold the phone
steering wheel switches.

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

button on the

c. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.

There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.

There are different methods to make a call. Select
one of the following options instead of the “Call
(Phonebook)” key in step 2 above.

Answer:
Accept an incoming call to talk.

Redial:
Dial the previously dialed number again.

On Hold:
Put an incoming call on hold.

Call (Call Logs):
Select the name or phone number from the incoming or outgoing call logs.

Reject Call:
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures
listed below.

Call (Downloaded):
Select the name or phone number from the
downloaded call list.
Dial (Keypad):
Input the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen. For information on
how to use the touch screen, see “How to use the
touch screen” earlier in this section.

LHA0987

RECEIVING A CALL
When you hear a phone ring, the display will
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow
the one of the procedures listed below.

a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
c. Press and hold the phone
steering wheel switches.

button on the

a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
c. Press the phone
wheel switches.

button on the steering

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Dial (Keypad):
Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.
For example, entering your PIN number for voicemail.
Cancel Mute:
This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.
Mute will be cancelled.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, press the volume control switch located
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume
control knob on the instrument panel while talking
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.
LHA0988

LHA0978

DURING A CALL

PHONE SETTING

There are some options available during a call.
Select one of the following displayed on the
screen if necessary.

To set up the hands-free phone system to your
preferred settings, press the SETTING button,
then touch the “Phone” key on the display.

Hang up:
Finish the call.

Phonebook:
See “Phonebook” earlier in this section for adding, editing and deleting a contact.

Use Handset:
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Downloaded Phonebook:
See the following information for each item.

Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phonebook:
Delete a single entry from the downloaded
phonebook. Touch the corresponding letter
key, then touch on the name key you wish to
delete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete the
entry.
Automatic Hold:
If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be
placed on hold automatically after several rings.

LHA0979

● Download All:
Transfer phonebook entries from your cellular phone to the vehicle’s phonebook. For
more information, see “Phonebook download” earlier in this section.
● Delete Downloaded Phonebook:
Delete all of the downloaded phonebook
entries.

Use Vehicle Ringtone:
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is
different from the cellular phone’s will sound
when receiving a call.
Delete Call Logs:
Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from
the list.
Bluetooth Setup:
See the following information for each item.

LHA0980

● Bluetooth:
If this item is turned off, the connection between the cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module will be canceled.
● Bluetooth Info:
Check information about the device name,
vehicle name, device address device PIN
and connection status.
● Pair Phone:
See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.
● Priority Change
If multiple phones are registered to the system, you can change the priority of the
phones on the shown list.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on
this vehicle, such as the display, audio, climate
control, DVD, phone and navigation systems.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
button located on the steering wheel.
the
Then speak the command for the system you
wish to activate. The command given is picked up
by the microphone, and it is performed when it is
properly recognized. At this time NISSAN Voice
Recognition will provide a voice and message (in
the center display) to inform you of the command
results.
LHA0989

● Remove Paired Phone:
Delete a registered cellular phone from the
paired list.
● Paired Phone List:
Up to 5 registered cellular phones are
shown on the list.
● Edit Phone Name:
If you would like to change the way your
phone’s name is displayed, select this key; a
character input screen will be displayed.

COMMAND LIST

LHA0892

Displaying command list
If you are controlling the system by voice commands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the following procedure for displaying the voice command
list and help list.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
2. Touch the “Others” key, then touch the
“Voice Recognition” key.
3. Touch the “Command List” key.
4. Touch one of the category keys.
5. Touch one of the item keys in the category; a
command list will be shown.
6. If necessary, scroll the screen by touching
the “DOWN” key or the “UP” key to view the
entire list.

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0908

LHA0899

LHA0990

7. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
For information on how to use the touch screen,
see “How to use the touch screen” earlier in this
section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0991

LHA0992

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

List of help commands
Navigation help:
See the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual for details.
Audio help:
● Music Box
COMMAND
Music Box Play

ACTION
Turns on the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.

Play by Mood

Plays the specified song matching your mood.

Relaxing Music

Plays the specified relaxing music.

Lively Music

Plays the specified lively music.

Slow Music

Plays the specified slow music.

Upbeat Music

Plays the specified upbeat music.

Play by Category

Plays the specified song in the specified category.

My Favorites

Plays your favorite song.

Hit Songs

Plays the specified hit song.

Kids’ Songs

Plays the specified song for children.

Rarely Played

Plays a rarely played song.

Music Box OFF

Turns off the Music Box.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Radio
– Radio
COMMAND

ACTION

Radio Play

Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Radio AM

Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

Radio FM

Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

Tune <87.7 - 107.9>

Tunes to the specified FM frequency.

Tune <530 - 1710>

Tunes to the specified AM frequency.

Preset <1 - 6>

Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset

Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <1 - 6>

Switches directly to the specified preset bank.

Radio OFF

Turns the radio off.

Radio Menu

Displays the radio menu.

– Satellite (if so equipped)
COMMAND

ACTION

Satellite Radio

Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Satellite Radio Channel <1 - 255>

Tunes to the specified SAT frequency.

Preset <1 - 6>

Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset

Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <1 - 6>

Switches directly to the specified preset bank.

Radio OFF

Turns the radio off.

Radio Menu

Displays the radio menu.

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● DVD (if so equipped)
NOTE:
DVD commands are available while a DVD is being played.
COMMAND
DVD Play

ACTION
Turns the DVD player on, selecting the track last played.

DVD Stop

Stops playing the DVD.

Track <1 to 99>

Switches to the specified DVD track.

Chapter <1 to 999>

Switches to the specified DVD chapter.

Title <1 to 99>

Switches to the specified DVD title.

Title <1 to 99> Chapter <1 to 999>

Switches to the specified DVD title on the specified chapter.

Group <1 to 9>

Switches to the specified DVD group.

Group <1 to 9> Play Track <1 to 99>

Switches to the specified DVD group on the specified track.

Menu Skip

DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly.

Menu Skip OFF

Turns off the menu skip.

DVD OFF

Turns the DVD player off.

DVD Menu

Switches to the specified DVD menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● CD
COMMAND

ACTION

CD Play

Starts to play a CD.

Track <1 - 512>

Switches to the specified track.

Folder <1 - 255>

Selects the specified MP3 folder and plays the first file.

Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512>

Switches to the specified track on the specified MP3 folder.

CD OFF

Stops the CD playback.

CD Text

Displays the information about the track currently being played.

CD Menu

Displays the CD menu.

● Others
– Audio
COMMAND

ACTION

Audio Play

Turns the audio system on.

Audio OFF

Turns the audio system off.

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

– CF
COMMAND

ACTION

Compact Flash Play

Starts to play the files saved in the CompactFlash™ card.

Track <1 - 512>

Switches to the specified track.

Folder <1 - 255>

Selects the specified folder in the CompactFlash™ card and plays the first file.

Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512>

Switches to the specified track in the specified folder in the CompactFlash™ card.

Compact Flash OFF

Stops the playback of the CompactFlash™ card.

Compact Flash Text

Displays the information about the file currently being played.

Compact Flash Menu

Displays the CompactFlash™ menu.

Phone help:
COMMAND
Phone Redial

ACTION
Redials the phone number last dialed.

Phone Dial

Dials the phone number given in the command.

Phone Dial

Dials the phone number given in the command. Speak the phone number in one sequence. The number is automatically dialed.

Phonebook

Shows the first page of the Phonebook list.

Phonebook< Voicetag>

Dials the phone number registered in the specified “voicetag”.

Outgoing Calls

Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).

Incoming Calls

Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).

Phone Select

Selects another cellular phone registered in the system.

Play Phonebook

Outputs the “Voicetags” registered in the system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Climate control help:
COMMAND

ACTION

Climate Control

Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.

Climate Control OFF

Turns the climate control system off.

Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C>

Sets the climate control temperature to the value given in the command.

Driver Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C>

Sets the driver’s side temperature to the value given in the command.

Passenger Temperature <60 - 90> or <18 - 32°C>

Sets the passenger’s side temperature to the value given in the command.

Others help:
● Vehicle
COMMAND

ACTION

Fuel Economy

Displays the Fuel Economy screen.

Trip Computer

Displays the Trip Computer screen.

Maintenance

Displays the Maintenance screen.

Tire Pressure

Displays the Tire Pressure screen.

Status

Displays the Status screen.

● Help
COMMAND
Help

ACTION
Displays the command list option screen.

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Voice Recognition Settings
Displays the description of voice recognition
settings.
● Adapting the System to Your Voice
Simulates an example of the operation to
adapt the system to your voice.
For the items “Using the Address Book” and
“Finding a Street Address”, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual for details.
For information on how to use the touch screen,
see “How to use the touch screen” earlier in this
section.
LHA0993

Displaying the user guide
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
displaying a simplified User Guide or by displaying simulated voice command operations.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
2. Touch the “Others” key, then touch the
“Voice Recognition” key.
3. Touch the “User Guide” key.

LHA0994

Available items:
● Getting Started
Displays the simplified User Guide describing how to operate the voice recognition
system.
● Placing Calls
Simulates voice commands to make a phone
call by voice command operation.

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which
takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the
button is pressed before the initialization completes, the display will show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”

● Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
● When the climate control is in the AUTO
mode, the fan speed decreases automatically for easy recognition.
● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.

LHA0995

LHA0996

Giving voice commands
1. Press the

● Start speaking a command within 1.5 seconds after the tone sounds.

1 .
button s

2. The system announces: “Please say a command after a tone.”

● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon of
the display changes, speak a command. For
additional information, see “List of help commands” earlier in this section.
4. Voice and message feedback will be provided when the command is accepted.
● If the command is not recognized, the system announces: “Please say again.” Repeat
the command in a clear voice.

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● If you want to cancel the command, press
button for 2 seconds
and hold the
during feedback. The system will announce:
“Voice cancelled.”
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control
switch
or the
on the steering
wheel while being provided with the feedback.

Operating tips
● Voice commands cannot be accepted when
the face icon in the display is gray.
● If the command is not recognized, the system announces, “Please say again”. Repeat
the command in a clear voice.
● Press the BACK button once to return to the
previous screen.
● If you want to cancel the command, press
and hold the
TALK button for 1 second. The message “Voice canceled” will be
announced.
● Press the
TALK button again to pause
the operation. Press the
TALK button
to restart the operation.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback, push the volume control
or
on the steering wheel
switch
or use the audio system volume knob while
the system is making an announcement.

Radio frequencies:
Speak radio frequencies according to the following examples:
● 930 kHz
– “Tune nine thirty AM”

SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the following systems:
● Navigation (if so equipped)

– “Tune nine thirty”
● 1000 kHz
– “Tune one thousand”
● 1040 kHz

● Audio (radio and CD)
● DVD Mobile Entertainment System
● BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone

– “Tune ten forty”
● 1710 kHz
– “Tune seventeen ten”

● Climate Control

● 97.9 MHz

● Vehicle Systems

– “Tune ninety seven point nine”

For additional information on the navigation system, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

● 100.5 MHz

How to say numbers

● 101.1 MHz

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following examples.

– “Tune one hundred point five”
– “Tune one oh one point one FM”

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for
“0”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Temperatures (climate control):
Speak temperatures according to the following
examples:
● 74°F
– “Temperature seventy four”
● 21.5°C

– “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”.
Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone
dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits.
Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five
five six thousand”.

– “Temperature twenty one point five”

Personal vocabulary (voicetags)

– “Temperature twenty one and a half”

NISSAN Voice Recognition provides the function
called “voicetags”, which can be associated with
the phone and the navigation system (if so
equipped). Using your own voice, 40 voicetags
can be registered in the “Phonebook” (phone)
and 20 locations can be registered in the “Address Book” (navigation system).

● 19.0°C
– “Temperature nineteen point zero”
– “Temperature nineteen point oh.”
– “Temperature nineteen”
Phone numbers:
Speak phone numbers according to the following
examples:
● 1-800-662-6200

For additional information, see “BluetoothT
Hands-Free Phone System” earlier in this section
and/or the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped) for the method of “voicetag” registration.

LHA0884

VOICE COMMAND LEARNING
FUNCTION
The voice recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.

● say “Dial” or “Phone dial” the system will
respond with “Please say the first group of
numbers”, then say:
– “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”,
– “one eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”, or

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0909

Having the system learn the user’s
voice
1. Press the SETTING button on the instrument panel, touch the “Others” key on the
display.
2. Touch the “Voice Recognition” key.
3. Touch the “Voice Command Learning” key.

LHA0910

LHA0997

4. Touch one of the User number keys to have
your voice memorized by the system as that
user.
5. Touch a category to be learned by the system from the following list:
● Audio
● Phone
● Vehicle Info.
● Others
The voice commands in the category are displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0998

LHA1000

LHA0999

6. Touch a voice command. The voice recognition system starts.

7. The system requests that you repeat a command after a tone.
8. After the tone sounds and the face icon on
the screen changes from to gray to orange,
speak the command that the system requested.
9. When the system has recognized the voice
command, the voice of the user is learned.
Press the BACK button to return to the previous
screen. If the system has learned the command
correctly, the voice command indicator on the
screen turns on.

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Reset Result:
Resets the user’s voice that the voice recognition system has learned.
● Continuous Learning:
When this item is turned to ON, you can
have the system learn the voice commands
in succession, without selecting commands
one by one.

LHA1001

LHA0884

Learning function settings

VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS

While inside the Voice Command Learning
screen, touch the “Setting” key to enable the
following items:

Press the SETTING button, then touch the “Others” key, then touch the “Voice Recognition” key;
the voice recognition settings screen will appear.

● Edit Name:
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen.
● Store Result:
When this item is turned to ON, the voice
recognition system can easily recognize the
user’s voice that it has learned.

Command List:
For information, see “List of help commands”
earlier in this section.
Minimize Voice Feedback:
When this item is enabled (indicator is illuminated), vocal feedback during voice recognition
is reduced when the system is activated.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LHA0909

LHA0910

Voice Command Learning:
For information, see “Voice command learning
function” earlier in this section.
User Guide:
For information, see “Displaying the user guide”
earlier in this section.

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number. Try
each solution in turn, starting with number one,
until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the system fails to interpret the
command correctly.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. See Command list in this section.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

The system consistently selects the wrong
voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Address Book Directory
or Phone Directory command.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MEMO

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Intelligent Key System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Hill start assist (HSA) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-35
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
WARNING
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
● Keep the lift gate and rear windows
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with
the lift gate or rear windows open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation but2. Set the
ton (if so equipped) to off and the fan
control dial to 4 (high) to circulate
the air.
● If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the lift gate or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.

5-2 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.

CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual
operating
conditions
are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving 5-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
● The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in low
ambient temperature, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
● You can also check the pressure of all tires
(except the spare tire) on the display screen.
The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond
with the actual order of the tire position. See
“Tire pressure information” in the “Display

screen, heater, air conditioner and audio
systems” section.
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.

5-4 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a
variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.
This gives them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing
you to anticipate problems. However, they are not
designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at
all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt.
Be sure to read the driving safety precautions
later in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects, or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt
as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do
so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is

Starting and driving 5-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your

ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for
leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that two-wheel drive models are less
capable than four-wheel drive models for rough
road driving and extrication when stuck in deep
snow or mud, or the like.
Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING
● Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
passengers in position when driving
over rough terrain.
● Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can
tip over sideways much more easily
than they can forward or backward.

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you may stall. If
you drive down them, you may not be
able to control your speed. If you drive
across them, you may roll over.
● Do not shift gears while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
● Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off
or other hazard that could cause an
accident.
● If your engine stalls or you cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle
could tip or roll over. Always back
straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never
back down in N (Neutral) or with the
clutch depressed (manual transmission
vehicles), using only the brake, as this
could cause loss of control.
● Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
gear to control your speed. Use the Hill
Descent Control feature (if so
equipped).

5-6 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around
when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be
thrown forward and cause injury to you
or your passengers.

● Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center
of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower
speeds ensure better vehicle control.

● To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack/gear bin (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the
load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo
area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires
larger than specified in this manual.
This could cause your vehicle to roll
over.

● Do not drive beyond the performance
capability of the tires, even with 4WD
engaged.

● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
● Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers have
their seat belts fastened.
● Always drive with the floor mats in
place as the floor may become hot.

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer
(such as the dynamometers used by
some states for emissions testing), or
similar equipment even if the other two
wheels are raised off the ground. Make
sure you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may
result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle
has a higher center of gravity than a
two-wheel drive vehicle. The vehicle is
not designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional two-wheel
drive vehicles. Failure to operate this
vehicle correctly could result in loss of
control and/or a rollover accident.

Starting and driving 5-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

IGNITION SWITCH
● Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
wheels when driving on slippery roads
and drive carefully.
● Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. See
“Brake system” later in this section for
“Wet brakes”.
● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.
● Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance
may be required. See “Periodic maintenance” in the “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide.”

WARNING
● Never remove or turn the key to the
LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle and
could result in serious vehicle damage
or personal injury.
● Never turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle and
could result in serious vehicle damage
or personal injury.
LSD0171

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
When turning the ignition switch, make sure the
selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
If the selector lever is not returned to the P (Park)
position, the ignition switch cannot be moved
toward LOCK.
When the ignition switch cannot be turned toward the LOCK position while keeping the Intelligent Key within range, proceed as follows:

5-8 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)
position.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON
direction.
3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.
The selector lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the foot brake pedal is
depressed.
There is an OFF position in between LOCK and
ACC, although it does not show on the lock
cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering
wheel is not locked.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclockwise from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. To unlock the
steering wheel, push the ignition switch in
and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.
If the battery of the vehicle equipped with
the Intelligent Key system is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be turned from
the LOCK position, even using the mechanical key.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
B position
Push in the ignition switch to the s
when you turn it.
A :
LOCK (Normal parking position) s

CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

The ignition switch can only be locked in the
LOCK position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
C
pushed in, and turned to the ACC position s
while carrying the Intelligent Key.
C :
ACC (Accessories) s

This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
D :
ON (Normal operating position) s

This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.
E :
START s

This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the knob immediately.
It will automatically return to the ON position.
The ignition switch cannot be turned back to the
LOCK position unless the selector lever is in the
B
P (Park) position. (It can be turned only to the s
position.)

Starting and driving 5-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

To remove the key from the ignition switch:
1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) position with the key in the ON position.
2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition.
If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position after the key is turned to the OFF position or when the key cannot be turned to the
LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the
key.

WSD0041

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be
turned to the LOCK position and removed until
the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)
position.

There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the steering wheel is not locked.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK position, turn the steering wheel to the left or
right while turning the key to unlock the
key cylinder.

4. Remove the key.

KEY POSITIONS

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON
position.

When removing the key from the ignition, make
sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)
position.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot
moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF
position or if the key is removed from the switch.

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)
position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK
position.

The shift selector lever can be moved if the
ignition switch is in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.

This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.

OFF: (Not used) (1)
ACC: (Accessories) (2)

ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.

5-10 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for
example, when interference is caused by another
registered key, an automated toll road device or
automatic payment device on the key ring), restart
the engine using the following procedures:

● Lock all doors.

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.
● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
● Check the operation of warning lights when
the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift selector lever cannot be
moved out of P (Park) and into any of
the other gear positions if the ignition
key is turned to the OFF position or if
the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift selector lever is in any of the
driving positions.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
key to START. Release the key when the
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
and then crank the engine. Release the
key and the accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key
ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Starting and driving 5-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the
key when the engine starts. If the engine
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the key off and wait 10
seconds before cranking again, otherwise
the starter could be damaged.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
In cold weather, keep the engine running for
a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it
off. Starting and stopping the engine over a
short period of time may make the vehicle
more difficult to start.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.

CAUTION
● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot
brake should be used for this purpose.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.

The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
selector lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift selector lever into a driving
gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
The automatic transmission is designed so
the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed
before shifting from P (Park) to any drive
position while the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The shift selector lever cannot be moved
out of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is turned
to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the
key is removed.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
electronically controlled to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.

5-12 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector
lever is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.

LSD0151

Type A

WSD0213

Type B
To move the selector lever:

If the switch is turned to the OFF or ACC position
for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral),
or any D (Drive) position, the switch cannot be
turned to the LOCK position and the key (if so
equipped) cannot be removed from the ignition
switch. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position, then the switch can be turned to LOCK.
P (Park):

: Push the button while depressing the
brake pedal
: Push the button to shift
: Shift without depressing brake pedal or
pushing the button

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the
P (Park) position while pressing the button.

Use this selector position when the vehicle is
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake
pedal should be depressed to move the
selector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
first, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park)
position.

Starting and driving 5-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

2WD and AUTO:

R (Reverse):

CAUTION
Use this position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Use this position to back up. Make sure the
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
must be depressed to move the selector
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive
position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
3 (Third gear) Type A only:
Use this position for driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking would be advantageous.
Do not downshift into the 3 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 3 position.

Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 1 position.

62 MPH (100 km/h)
4H:

2WD and AUTO:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

43 MPH (70 km/h)

4LO:

4H:

31 MPH (50 km/h)
2 (Second gear) Type A only:
Use this position for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.

43 MPH (70 km/h)
4LO:
31 MPH (50 km/h)

Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds
over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 2 position.
2WD and AUTO:
71 MPH (115 km/h)
4H:
62 MPH (100 km/h)
4LO:
31 MPH (50 km/h)
1 (Low gear) Type A only:
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,
or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.

5-14 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

M4 (Fourth):

● The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the
3rd range, the transmission will shift down
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

For driving up or down long slopes where engine
braking would be advantageous.

● Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

M5 (Fifth):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.

M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.

Return the selector lever to the D (Drive) position
to return the transmission to the normal driving
mode.

M1 (First):

WSD0212

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)
When the selector lever is shifted from D (Drive)
to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped
or while driving, the transmission enters the
manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected
manually.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter.
When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift
gate, the position indicator displays 1 (First) up to
5 (Fifth) depending on vehicle speed.

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
● Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than M4
range. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up:
Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down:

● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.

Move the selector lever to the 2 (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5

Starting and driving 5-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

6. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to
unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle
may be moved to the desired location.
If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

LSD0141

Type A

Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever
may not be moved from the P (Park) position even
with the brake pedal depressed.
To move the shift selector lever, release the shift
lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N
(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be
locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved
if the battery is discharged.

WSD0214

Type B
To push the shift lock release, complete the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key (if so equipped)
2. Apply the parking brake.

If the selector lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift
— in D position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as
shown.
4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
5. Press the shift lever button and move the
shift selector lever to the N (Neutral) position
while holding down the shift lock release.

5-16 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

PARKING BRAKE
OFF:

For driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking is necessary push the Overdrive switch
once. The O/D OFF indicator light
in the instrument panel comes on at
this time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing a
gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift
shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of
Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the
Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. The
O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel
comes on at this time.
LSD0142

Overdrive switch (if so equipped)
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmission is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON:

With the engine running and the
shift selector lever in the D (Drive)
position, the transmission upshifts
into Overdrive as vehicle speed
increases.

When driving conditions change, depress the
Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the gear shift in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the Overdrive off.
This reduces fuel economy.

Overdrive does not engage until the engine
has reached operating temperature.

Starting and driving 5-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CRUISE CONTROL
● The SET indicator light may blink when the
cruise control switch is turned ON while
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise
control system, use the following procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
LSD0158

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.

LSD0159

1.
2.
3.
4.

ACCEL/RES switch
COAST/SET switch
CANCEL switch
ON·OFF switch

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

To turn on the cruise control, push the main
switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel comes on.

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

5-18 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
light in the instrument panel goes out.
● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE
indicator light and SET indicator light in the
instrument panel go out.

To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.

● you depress the brake pedal while pushing
the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine
performance.
● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
● Avoid quick starts.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

●

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles.

Use 4H or 4L position only when
necessary. Four-wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.

● Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.

5-20 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

(4WD)

USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

WARNING
● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result in
drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer
(such as the dynamometers used by
some states for emissions testing), or
similar equipment even if the other two
wheels are raised off the ground. Make
sure you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may
result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

CAUTION
● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO
position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear
and increased fuel consumption.
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
you are driving on dry hard surface
roads:
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.

● The transfer case may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warning
light blinking rapidly.

All mode 4WD system (if so
equipped)
The all mode 4WD system provides 4 positions
(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select
the desired drive mode according to the driving
conditions.

– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
the transmission selector to the N
position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position for part time 4WD
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
the transmission selector to the N
position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.

Starting and driving 5-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:
4WD Shift
Switch Position

AUTO

2WD

4LO

Wheels
Driven

4WD shift

Indicator Light
Transfer 4LO position

Use Conditions

Rear
wheels or 4
wheels

For driving on paved or slippery
roads

Rear
wheels

For driving on dry, paved roads
(Economy drive) or state dynamometer I/M testing

4 wheels

For driving on rocky, sandy or
snow-covered roads

*1
May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic
transmission mechanical parking
lock, which will allow the vehicle
to roll. Do not leave the transfer
shift position in Neutral.*2

Illuminated

For use when maximum power
and traction is required (for example: on steep grades or rocky,
sandy, muddy roads)

Neutral

4 wheels

4WD Shift Procedure
Move the 4WD switch.
2WD <—> AUTO <—> 4H
4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position engaged.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE TRANSMISSION SELECTOR TO THE (N) POSITION IN THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) position.
3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with
the brake pedal depressed.
YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFT SWITCH
BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU
FIRST STOP THE VEHICLE DEPRESS THE BRAKE AND
SHIFT THE TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER TO THE
NEUTRAL (N) POSITION, THEN DEPRESS AND TURN THE
4WD SHIFT SWITCH TO 4LO OR 4H. *3

*1: The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the transmission selector has been shifted
to the N position. If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while.
Then the light will turn on or off.
• Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator
lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The
indicator light (if so equipped) will
also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control system” later in this section.

5-22 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to
select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the
driving conditions. There are four types of drive
modes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the
transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to
move between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and
4LO.
You must depress the switch to select 4LO,
and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the
automatic transmission selector lever in
the N position when changing into or out of
4LO.

WARNING
When parking, apply the parking brake
before stopping the engine and make sure
that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and
the ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise,
the vehicle could unexpectedly move even
if the automatic transmission is in the P
position.

CAUTION
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.
● The 4H position provides greater traction. Avoid excessive speed, as it will
cause increased fuel consumption and
higher oil temperatures, and could
damage
drivetrain
components.
Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H
is not recommended.
● The 4LO position provides maximum
traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as the maximum speed is approximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H
position. Do not move the 4WD shift
switch when making a turn or reversing.
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while driving
on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears (D1 or D2) for engine
braking.
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with the
rear wheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry
hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause
unnecessary noise and tire wear.
NISSAN recommends driving in the
2WD or AUTO position under these
conditions.
● The 4WD transfer case may not be
shifted between 4H and 4LO at low ambient temperatures and the transfer
4LO position indicator light may blink
even when the 4WD shift switch is
shifted. After driving for a while you can
change the 4WD transfer case between
4H and 4LO.
When driving on rough roads,
● Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or
4LO.
● Drive carefully according to the road surface
conditions.
When the vehicle is stuck,
● Place stones or wooden blocks under the
tires to free the vehicle.
● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

Starting and driving 5-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat
forward and backward movement to increase the movement.
● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chains
may be effective.

CAUTION
● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires
will sink deep into the mud, making it
difficult to free the vehicle.
● Avoid shifting gears with the engine
running at high speeds as this may
cause malfunction.

Part time 4WD system (if so
equipped)
The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions
(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the
desired drive mode according to the driving conditions.

5-24 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:
4WD Shift
Switch Position

Wheels Driven

4WD shift

Indicator Light
Transfer 4LO position

Rear wheels

For driving on dry, paved roads
(Economy drive) or state dynamometer I/M testing

4 wheels

For driving on rocky, sandy or
snow-covered roads

Neutral
*1
May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic
transmission mechanical parking
lock, which will allow the vehicle to
roll. Do not leave the transfer shift
position in Neutral.*2

Illuminated

For use when maximum power and
traction is required (for example: on
steep grades or rocky, sandy,
muddy roads)

2WD

4LO

Use Conditions

4 wheels

4WD Shift Procedure
Move the 4WD switch.
2WD <—> 4H
4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift
position engaged.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO SHIFT THE TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER TO THE N POSITION IN
THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION
WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission selector to the (N) position with the brake pedal depressed.
3. Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO
or 4H with the brake pedal depressed.
THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS
YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE
TRANSMISSION SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

*1: Before moving the transmission selector shift lever from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift
procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the
transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.
- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.
1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch 9OFF9.
2. Start the engine.
- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the transmission selector lever to Neutral position.
4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.
- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the transmission selector lever from Neutral position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator
lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The
indicator light (if so equipped) will
also turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control system” later in this section.

Starting and driving 5-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to
select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the
driving conditions. There are three types of drive
modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the
transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to
move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle
MUST be stationary, shift the transmission
selector to Neutral (N), and depress the
brake pedal. The switch must be depressed
and turned when changing into or out of
4LO.

WARNING
● When parking, apply the parking brake
before stopping the engine and make
sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is
on and the ATP warning light goes off.
Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P position.

● The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and remain illuminated or turn off
before shifting the transmission into
gear. If the transmission selector is
shifted from the (N) position to any
other gear when the 4LO indicator light
is blinking, the vehicle may move
unexpectedly.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) while driving on
steep downhill grades. Use the engine
brake and low automatic transmission
gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.
● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear
wheels spinning.
● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry
hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause
unnecessary noise and tire wear.
NISSAN recommends driving in the
2WD position under these conditions.
● The 4WD transfer case may not be
shifted between 4H and 4LO at low ambient temperatures and the transfer
4LO position indicator light may blink
even when the 4WD shift switch is
shifted. After driving for a while you can
change the 4WD transfer case between
4H and 4LO.
When driving on rough roads,
● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
● Drive carefully according to the road surface
conditions.

5-26 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

When the vehicle is stuck,
● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat
forward and backward movement to increase the movement.
● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place
stones or wooden blocks under the tires.
Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire
chains may be effective.

4WD shift switch operations

LSD0144

Type A
● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the
2WD, AUTO (Type A only), 4H or 4LO position, depending on driving conditions.
● With the switch set to the AUTO position
(Type A only), distribution of torque to the
front and rear wheels changes automatically,
depending on road conditions encountered
[ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) → 50 : 50 (4WD)].
This results in improved driving stability.

LSD0145

Type B
● If the 4WD shift switch is operated
while making a turn, accelerating or
decelerating or if the key switch is
turned off while in the AUTO (Type A
only), 4H or 4LO, you may feel a jolt.
This is not abnormal.
● When the vehicle is stopped after making a turn, you may feel a slight jolt
after the selector lever is shifted to N or
P. This occurs because the transfer
clutch is released and not because of a
malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

area around the vehicle is safe, and
drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or
decelerate or move the vehicle in reverse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.

CAUTION
● When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H
position. Do not move the 4WD shift
switch when making a turn or reversing.

● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the
4WD indicator light goes out.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while
driving on steep downhill grades. Use
the engine brake and low automatic
transmission gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
with the rear wheels spinning.
● Before placing the 4WD shift switch in
the 4H position from 2WD or AUTO,
ensure the vehicle speed is less than
62.5 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so
can damage the 4WD system.
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.
● Engine idling speed is high while warming up the engine. Be especially careful
when starting or driving on slippery surfaces with the 4WD shift switch set in
AUTO.

4WD shift indicator light

LSD0147

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the
odometer display.
The light should turn off within 1 second after
turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator light will illuminate the position selected by
the 4WD shift switch.
● The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
while shifting from one drive mode to
the other. When the shifting is completed, the 4WD shift indicator light
will come on. For all mode 4WD vehicles, if the indicator light does not
come on immediately, make sure the

● When the 4WD shift switch is turned to
the AUTO position at low ambient temperatures, the 4WD shift indicator light
may show 4H. If this happens, all four
wheels are driven as torque distribution
is in the 4H position. Be careful as the
vehicle may become difficult to turn.
When the vehicle is driven, the 4WD
shift indicator light should change to
AUTO.
● If the 4WD shift indicator light indication changes to 2WD when the 4WD
shift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4H
position at low ambient temperatures,
the 2WD mode may be being engaged
due to malfunctioning drive system. If
the indicator does not return to normal
and the 4WD warning light comes on,
have the system checked by the nearest
NISSAN dealer.

5-28 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

4WD warning light

Warning light

Comes on or blinks
when:

Comes on

There is a malfunction in the 4–wheel
drive system

Blinks rapidly

The transfer case
oil temperature is
abnormally high (all
mode 4WD vehicles)

Blinks slowly

The difference in
wheel rotation is
large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.
The 4WD warning light comes on when the key
switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the
engine is started.
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system
when the key switch is ON, the warning light will
either remain illuminated or blink.
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD
shift indicator light goes out.

For all mode 4WD vehicles, high-temperature
transfer case oil makes the warning light blink
rapidly (about twice per second). If the warning
light blinks rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately. Then if the light
goes off after a while, you can continue driving.
A large difference between the diameters of front
and rear wheels will make the warning light blink
slowly (about once per two seconds). Change
the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive
fast.

CAUTION
● If the warning light comes on or blinks
slowly during operation or rapidly after
stopping the vehicle for a while, have
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not
recommended when the 4WD warning
light turns on.
● When the warning light comes on, the
2WD mode may be engaged even if the
4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be
especially careful when driving. If corresponding parts are malfunctioning, the
4WD mode will not be engaged even if
the 4WD shift switch is shifted.

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO
position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear
and increased fuel consumption.
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
you are driving on dry hard surface
roads:
– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the
4WD shift switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position for all mode 4WD
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
the transmission selector to the N
position and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
– in the 4LO position for part time 4WD
vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift
the transmission selector to the N
position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift
switch to 2WD.
● If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
● The transfer case may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warning
light blinking rapidly.

Starting and driving 5-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
A
● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
B
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s

Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C
CURB: s
WSD0050

WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift
lever has been pushed as far forward as
it can go and cannot be moved without
depressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
and remove the key.

● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

5-30 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

POWER STEERING

BRAKE SYSTEM

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, especially
in sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.

Starting and driving 5-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
● Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
– For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
- 10 km/h).
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the system electronically
controls the pressure applied to each brake.
This action is similar to pumping the brakes very
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is
operating properly. However, the pulsation may
indicate that road conditions are hazardous and
extra care is required while driving.

Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

5-32 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When accelerating or driving on slippery surfaces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect
these movements and control the braking and
engine output to help improve vehicle stability.

● Drive the vehicle at speeds above 10 mph
(15 km/h) for at least 10 minutes.

● When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC)
system is operating, the SLIP indicator in
the instrument panel blinks.

● If you interrupt the reset procedure by turning the ignition off, you will need to restart
the reset procedure.

● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO
the
indicator light will come on and
the VDC system will be turned off. See
“Transfer case shifting procedures” earlier in
this section.

If after driving the vehicle for more than 10 minlights remain illumiutes and the SLIP and
nated in the instrument panel, have the vehicle
dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road conditions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your
speed and driving to these conditions. See
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic
control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic
control system off using the VDC OFF switch,
most VDC functions will be turned off. The VDC
system will still try to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to one with more traction when
the VDC system switch is OFF. The SLIP indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS
will still operate with the VDC system off.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the traction control system may be disabled and the
SLIP and
indicator lights will not turn off
after 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Perform the following procedure to reset the
system:

● The VDC OFF indicator light should go off
indicating the traction control system is operational.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel
a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or
vibration from under the hood. This is normal and
indicates that the VDC system is working properly.

● Start the engine and set the steering wheel
in the straight forward position.

Starting and driving 5-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.

WARNING
● The vehicle dynamic control system is
designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due
to abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful when
driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the vehicle dynamic control
system may not operate properly and
the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars
and bushings are not NISSAN approved

for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the vehicle dynamic control
system may not operate properly. This
could adversely affect vehicle handling
performance, and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on.
● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners,
the vehicle dynamic control system may
not operate properly and the VDC OFF
indicator light may come on. Do not
drive on these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the vehicle dynamic control off
indicator light may illuminate. This is
not a malfunction. Restart the engine
after driving onto a stable surface.
● If wheels or tires other than the recommended ones are used, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate
properly and the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may come on.
● The vehicle dynamic control system is
not a substitute for winter tires or tire
chains on a snow covered road.

WARNING
● Never rely solely on the hill descent
control system to control vehicle speed
when driving on steep down hill grades.
Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed
by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving
on frozen, muddy or an extremely steep
downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious
injury or death.
● The hill descent control may not control
the vehicle speed on a hill under all load
or road conditions. Always be prepared
to depress the brake pedal to control
vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
The hill descent control system helps maintain
vehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph
(25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill
descent control is useful when engine braking
alone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed.
Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes to
control vehicle speed allowing the driver to concentrate on steering while reducing the burden of
brake and accelerator operation.

5-34 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

HILL START ASSIST (HSA) SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
● When additional braking is required on
steep downhill roads activate the hill descent control system by pushing the switch
ON, see “Hill descent control switch” in the
“Instruments and controls” section.
● Once the system is activated the indicator
light will remain on in the instrument panel,
see “Hill descent control system on indicator
light” in the “Instruments and controls” section.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed
while the hill descent control system is on, the
system will stop operating temporarily. As soon
as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the
hill descent control system begins to function
again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
For the best results, when descending steep
downhill grades, the hill descent control switch
should be ON and the selector lever in 2 (Second
gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking.

WARNING
● Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive
carefully and attentively. Depress the
brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped on a steep hill. Be especially
careful when stopped on a hill on frozen
or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle
and possible serious injury or death.
● The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill
on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll backwards and may result in a
collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically keeps
the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards in the time it takes the
driver to release the brake pedal and apply the
accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
Hill start assist will operate automatically under
the following conditions:
● The selector lever is shifted to a forward or
reverse gear.
● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill
by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2
seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill
start assist will stop operating completely.
Hill start assist will not operate when the selector
lever is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level road.

● The hill start assist may not prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill
under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards. Failure to do so may result
in a collision or serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-35

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so
equipped).

If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.

5-36 Starting and driving

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
● Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
● Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.

Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.

Starting and driving 5-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MEMO

5-38 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

FIRST AID KIT

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)

LCE0104

A first aid kit is located on the back door trim
panel. To remove the first aid kit:
1
s
2
s

Squeeze the latch buttons.
Pull the two straps apart to unfasten.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays pressure of
all tires (except the spare tire) on the display
screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being
driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure
warning light. This system will activate only when
the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). For more details, refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire
pressure information” in the “Display screen,
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

6-2 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.

WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the automatic transmission
is shifted into P (Park).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the shift selector lever to P
(Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WCE0044

Blocking wheels
1 at both the front and
Place suitable blocks s
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
s
jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

LCE0105

1.
2.

Jack
Jack tools

Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the back door.
2. Lift the handle on the floor and open the
storage area.
3. Remove the jack and jack tools.

LCE0106

4. Find the oval-shaped opening above the
middle of the bumper. Pass the T-shaped
end of the jack rod through the opening and
direct it toward the spare tire winch, located
directly above the spare tire.

CAUTION
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
designed to be inserted at an angle as
shown.

6-4 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into
the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in
the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod
counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.
7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,
reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer
chain, and carefully slide the tire from under
the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION
Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift the
spare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING

LCE0107

5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the
square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form
a handle.

● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or
vehicle is on the
vehicle to move.
for
vehicles
differentials.

run the engine while
jack. It may cause the
This is especially true
with
limited
slip

● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
Always refer to the illustration for the correct
placement and jack-up points for your specific
vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.

In case of emergency 6-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The
jack-up points are indicated by stamped arrows on the side of the frame.

WCE0139

LCE0087

The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack
as shown.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the
tire clears the ground.

6-6 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the
tire.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence illustrated. Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.

WCE0063

Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.

In case of emergency 6-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

JUMP STARTING
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label affixed to
the driver side center pillar.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the
vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressure
increases as the tire temperature rises.
This does not indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
● The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.

6-8 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
WCE0054

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off
all unnecessary electrical systems (lights,
heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence ilA,s
B,s
C,s
D ).
lustrated (s

In case of emergency 6-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
● Always connect positive (1) to positive
(1) and negative (2) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot
be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission
damage.

WARNING
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is still
hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
● Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading and
the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine
coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you
feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc. take the following steps.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.

6-10 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:

WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any unit is damaged, dollies must be
used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.

In case of emergency 6-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

Two-wheel drive models
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
● Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the front wheels
raised always use towing dollies under
the rear wheels.
● When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or on towing dollies:

ACE1037

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel
in a straight-ahead position with a
rope or similar device. Never secure
the steering wheel by turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This
may damage the steering lock
mechanism.

6-12 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

If the speed or distance must necessarily be
greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing
to prevent damage to the transmission.

WSD0097

Four-wheel drive models
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
● Never tow 4WD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
transfer case and transmission.

In case of emergency 6-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.

CAUTION

LCE0103

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
Pulling a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the recovery device manufacturer’s instructions.
Attach the tow strap to the towing hook.

WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:

● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the main structural members of
the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so
equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body
will be damaged.

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System
(if so equipped).

● Use the towing hook (if so equipped)
only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,
snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle
for a long distance using only the towing hook.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.

● The towing hook is under tremendous
force when used to free a stuck vehicle.
Never pull the hook at an angle.
● Always pull the cable straight out from
the front or rear of the vehicle.
● Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling
systems.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D.
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.

6-14 In case of emergency

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
● after driving on coastal roads.
● when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.

CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.

7-2 Appearance and care

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

REMOVING SPOTS

CAUTION

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.

When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.

UNDERBODY

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily with an
oil-based tire dressing.
● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.

● Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.

FLOOR MATS

Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION
● Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter what
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for
your vehicle and are properly positioned in
the footwell to prevent interference with
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained
with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

WAI0006

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side
only)
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a
grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat
by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the
floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in
the footwell.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.

7-4 Appearance and care

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
● Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
● Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.

Appearance and care 7-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CAUTION
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Variable Voltage Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Intelligent Key battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with long
service intervals to save you both time and
money. However, some day-to-day and regular
maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its
emission and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide.” You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than after they have worked on it.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,
make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check
for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the grommet seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter in
vehicles equipped with TPMS at every tire replacement or when reaching the wear limit of the
tires.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
● For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet .
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found later in this section.
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position
mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in
the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake Confirm that your vehicle is held
securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking
brake applied.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head restraints
move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on
the reservoir.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Move the shift selector
lever to P (Park).
● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition key is in the OFF position and the
engine is not running. To avoid injury,
always disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.

● If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
● If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.

CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ40DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Fuse/fusible link box
Fuse and relay box
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Drive belt location
Radiator cap
Power steering fluid reservoir
Battery
Engine coolant reservoir

WDI0633

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

VK56DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Fuse/fusible link box
Engine oil dipstick
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Drive belt location
Radiator cap
Power steering fluid reservoir
Fuse and relay box
Battery
Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0627

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection.The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not
necessary.

WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
● The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent
with the proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled
water. The use of other types of coolant
solutions or coolant colors, such as orange, may damage the engine cooling
system.
Outside temperature
down to
°C

°F

-35

-30

Genuine
NISSAN
Long Life
Antifreeze/
Coolant or
equivalent

Demineralized or distilled water

50%

LDI0436

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.
The engine coolant reservoir is a pressurized tank. When installing the cap, tighten
it until a clicking sound is heard.

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

ENGINE OIL
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
● Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
● Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.

LDI0437

VQ40DE engine

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

LDI0628

VK56DE engine
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
B . This is the normal operL (Low) marks s
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
A , remove the oil filler cap
the L (Low) mark s
and pour recommended oil through the
C.
opening. Do not overfill s
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WDI0500

LDI0371

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.

VQ40DE engine

WDI0504

VK56DE engine

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
A cap by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler s
counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B.
s

B with a wrench by
5. Remove the drain plug s
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” later in this section.

WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
● Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
● Check your local regulations.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.

WDI0502

VQ40DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.
4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter exposing the filter.
A with an oil filter
5. Loosen the oil filter s
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID
8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
9. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary.

WDI0505

VK56DE

CAUTION

When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION
● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF.
Do not mix with other fluids.
● Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
will cause deterioration in driveability
and automatic transmission durability,
and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
The specified automatic transmission fluid is also
described on caution labels located in the engine
compartment.

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the engine.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE FLUID
For further brake fluid specification information,
refer to “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage
the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
WDI0256

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine
NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through
the opening.

● Be sure to clean the filler cap before
removing.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.

LDI0440

VQ40DE

BRAKE FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
● DO NOT OVERFILL.
● Recommended
fluid
is
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

Genuine

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WINDOW WASHER FLUID
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution.
This may result in damage to the paint.
LDI0374

VK56DE

LDI0441

WINDOW WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.
Add window washer fluid when the low window
washer fluid warning light comes on.
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window
washer fluid into the tank opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

BATTERY
● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.

● When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.

● Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.

● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.

WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames or
electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After
touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.

WDI0224

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver
as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.

LDI0454

CAUTION
● Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
LDI0302

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill.

● Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

DRIVE BELT
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle
A located near the
ground it to the body ground s
battery along the negative battery cable.

LDI0449

LDI0399

VQ40DE

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

VK56DE

Power steering fluid pump
Cooling fan
Air conditioner
Crankshaft
Generator

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Power steering fluid pump
Crankshaft
Generator
Air conditioner
Water pump
Cooling fan
WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped s
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

AIR CLEANER

WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.

LDI0376

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe the
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the
cover with a damp cloth.
To remove the air cleaner filter:
1
s
2
s
3
s

Loosen the screw.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleaner
cover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

LDI0442

1. Open the glove box and press in on the
sides so that it will open completely allowing
it to hang by the cord.

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.
To replace the filter, perform the following procedure:

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.

LDI0387

2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the
filter cover.

LDI0404

NOTE:
The filters are marked with air flow arrows.
The end of the filter with the arrow should
face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows
should face downward.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver
vision.

3. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide
it over to the right. Insert the second filter
into the housing.
4. Replace the filter cover.
5. Install the glove box door.
6. Fill out the date information on the small
replacement label and attach it to the glove
box lid.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

WDI0408

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2
s

Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.

3
s

Remove the wiper blade.

WDI0595

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
A . This may
to let wax get into the washer nozzle s
cause clogging or improper windshield washer
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it
B.
with a needle or small pin s

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WDI0292

Rear window wiper blade
1
s

Lift the wiper arm away from the rear window.

2
s

Push the wiper blade in and pivot until the
blade becomes free.

3
s

Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm and
snap into place.

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

BRAKES

FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.

Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.

LDI0455

Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in the
fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is
used in the passenger compartment fuse box.
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine compartment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the underhood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.

LDI0444

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WDI0452
A , replace it with a new
5. If the fuse is open s
B.
fuse s

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.

Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

WDI0452

LDI0445

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.

Type A
A , replace it with an
4. If the fuse is open s
B.
equivalent good fuse s
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

LDI0456

Type B

LDI0484

KEYFOB

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
1
s
2
s

A.
Open the lid using a coin s
B.
Remove the battery s

Install a new battery
down.

s with the “+” facing
C

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
4
s

Close the lid securely.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

5. Press the
button, then the
button two or three times to check the keyfob operation.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
● An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
● The operational range of the keyfob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.

SDI1867

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
A into the slit s
B
2. Insert a small screwdriver s
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

WDI0535

● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.

C s
D.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated s

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the case.

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A
bulb can be replaced from inside the engine
compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

CAUTION
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time
as dust, moisture and smoke may enter
the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight.
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE
HANDS.
● Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed:
Wattage 65/55Bulb No. HB5/9007*
*: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest
parts information.

LDI0446

Removing the headlight bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
rear end of the bulb.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclockwise until it is free form the headlight reflecA.
tor and then remove it s
5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do not
shake or rotate the bulb when removing it
B.
s

Replacing the headlight bulb
1. Insert the bulb.
DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE
HANDS.
2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.
● Be sure the lip of the bulb socket contacts the headlight body.
3. Push the electrical connector into the bulb
plastic base until it snaps and stops.
4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.
5. Close the hood.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Wattage (W)

Bulb No.*1

Headlight

65/55

9007 (HB5)

Turn signal light/Parking light

28/8

3457AK*2

3.8

194

Item

Side marker
Rear combination light
Turn signal

3156AK

Stop/Tail

27/8

3157K

Back-up

921

License plate light*2

2J6

Fog light*2

H11

Personal lights*2

AL38

Map lights

AL38

Cargo light

AL89

High-mounted stop light*2

—

*1Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
*2The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

7.
8.

Headlight assembly
Fog light

LDI0450

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Map lights
Personal lights
Cargo light
High-mount stoplight
License plate light
Rear combination light

WDI0295

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
: Indicates bulb removal
: Indicates bulb installation

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WDI0206

Cargo light
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth s

LDI0459

Map lights

LDI0448

Rear combination light

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on
the display screen by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire pressure information” in the “Display screen, heater, air

conditioner and audio systems” section,
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
(if so equipped) under the “Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure”
heading. This label is affixed to the driver
side center pillar. Tire pressures should
be checked regularly because:

The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped). Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in
reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could
also lead to a serious accident.
Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85
MPH (137 km/h) unless it is
equipped with high speed rated
tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH
(137 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

6
s

Spare tire size or compact spare tire
size (if so equipped).

LDI0485

Tire and loading information label
1
s

Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.

2
s

Vehicle load limit: See loading information in the “Technical and consumer information” section.

3
s

Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.

5
s

Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire Placard (if so
equipped) or the Tire and Loading
Information label (if so equipped).
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
LDI0393

Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.

6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.

Size
Front Original Tire:
P245/75R16
P265/65R17
P265/70R16
P265/75R16
P265/60R18
Rear Original Tire:
P245/75R16
P265/65R17
P265/70R16
P265/75R16
P265/60R18
Spare Tire:
P245/75R16
P265/65R17
P265/70R16
P265/75R16
P265/60R18

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

240 kPa, 35 PSI

3. Remove the gauge.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.

WDI0395

Example

1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
s

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation press
sure

This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
WDI0396

Example

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
s

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Department Of Transportation.9 The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of Tire Identification Number.
2. Two-digit code:
identification mark

Manufacturer’s

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.

5 Maximum load rating
s

This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
s

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

3 Tire ply composition and material
s

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

7 The word “radial”
s

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
s

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

Summer tires

WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tire size. Other types
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners
when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the
tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your
vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear
paved roads.

WDI0258

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section in this manual for tire replacing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Wheel nut tightening torque:

● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.

● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.

WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WDI0259

1.
2.

Wear indicator
Location mark

Tire wear and damage
WARNING
● Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.

● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.

WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, ground clearance, body-totire clearance, tire chain clearance,
speedometer calibration, headlight aim
and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or
interference
with
the
brake
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section
of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail without warning.
● The use of retread
recommended.

tires

not

● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models
CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and
differential gears.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended
that all four tires be replaced with tires of the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.
The tire pressure and wheel alignment should
also be checked and corrected as necessary.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet .

Care of wheels
● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MEMO

8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-28
Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-30
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fuel
Engine oil *7
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change
Without oil filter change

VQ40DE
VK56DE
VQ40DE
VK56DE

Cooling system

With reservoir models w/o rear a/c
With reservoir models with rear a/c
Automatic transmission fluid
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake fluid
Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
All mode 4WD
Transfer fluid
Part time 4WD
Front final drive oil

Capacity (Approximate)
US measure
Imp measure
21-1/8 gal
17-5/8 gal

Liter
80

5-3/8 qt
6-1/2 qt
5-1/8 qt
6-1/4 qt

5.1
6.2
4.8
5.9

4-1/2 qt
5-1/2 qt
4-1/4 qt
5-1/4 qt

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

2-3/4 gal
2-1/4 gal
10.2
3-1/2 gal
3 gal
13.4
Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the “Maintenance and doit-yourself” section.
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—

Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF *3
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
HFC-134a (R-134a) *6
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6
Genuine Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada
NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid *8
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5
Viscosity SAE 80W-90 Gear Oil, *9
API GL-5 Synthetic 75W–90 Gear Oil or equivalent, *10
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid
or equivalent

Rear final drive oil
—
—
—
Windshield washer fluid (shared between
1-1/4 gal
1 gal
4.5
front and rear wipers)
*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”
*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”
*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*4: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ VI or equivalent ATF may also be used.
*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”
*7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”
*8: Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF or equivalent (if available) may also be used.
*9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).
*10: See your NISSAN dealer for service.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91
AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline is
not available you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI
number (Research octane number 91), but you
may notice a decrease in performance.

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
● The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
● If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
● If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.

E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.

However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

CAUTION
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
can damage fuel system components
and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

WTI0183

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. See 9Capacities
and recommended fuel/lubricants9 earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals”.

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
● driving in dusty conditions
● extensive idling
● towing a trailer
● stop and go commuting
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN
A/C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model

VQ40DE

VK56DE

Type

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement

6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°

Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

in (mm) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92)
cu in (cm3) 241.30 (3,954)
1–2–3–4–5–6

3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)
338.78 (5,552)
1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed
A/T (in “N” position)

No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation

DILFR5A11
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

DILFR5A11
0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheels

Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
2WD S/SE with roof
rack
2WD LE with roof rack
V8 2WD SE/LE with
roof rack
4WD S/SE with roof
rack
4WD SE-OR with roof
rack
4WD LE with roof rack
V8 4WD SE/LE with
roof rack
Front Track
Rear Track
Wheelbase

16 x 7.0J
17 x 7.5J
18 x 8.0J
Tires
P245/75R16
P265/70R16
P265/75R16
P265/65R17
P265/60R18
Spare tire

Full size

Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

in (mm)
in (mm)

192.3 (4884)
72.6 (1843)

in (mm)

72.4 (1838)

in (mm)
in (mm)

72.5 (1841)
72.5 (1841)

in (mm)

72.8 (1849)

in (mm)

73.3 (1861)

in (mm)
in (mm)

72.9 (1851)
72.9 (1851)

in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)

61.8 (1570)
61.8 (1570)
112.2 (2850)

lb (kg)

See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label” on the center
pillar between the driver’s side
front and side doors.

lb (kg)
lb (kg)

9-8 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.

LTI0085

LTI0086

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

LTI0127

VQ40DE engine

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

WTI0095

VK56DE engine

WTI0099

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WTI0173

WTI0100

WTI0167

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL

The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.

LTI0137

Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the
location mark (small dimple) using a 0.37 in
(9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the
drill. Insert two plastic grommets provided.
Install the license plate holder using the two
bolts (and washers) provided.
2. Mount the license plate using two M614mm bolts.
License plate bolt tightening torque:
3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped).
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
Both the GVWR and GAWR are located
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. See “Measurement of Weights”
later in this section.
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped). Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Capacity”
on the Tire and Loading Information label
(if so equipped).
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
LTI0152

Example

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of Weights” later in
this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.

WTI0125

LTI0126

Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooks

Cargo area floor tie-down hooks

SECURING THE LOAD

WARNING

There are tie down hooks located in the cargo
area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used
to secure cargo with ropes or other types of
straps.
Do not apply a total load of more than 55
A plastic hook or 44
lbs. (245 N) to a single s
B plastic hook
lbs. (196 N) to a single s
when securing cargo.
Do not apply a total load of more than 110
lbs. (490 N) to a single metal floor tie-down
hook when securing cargo.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
the cargo area. Secure any items in the
cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if
the top tether strap is damaged.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

● Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage could
occur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result in
loss of control and cause personal
injury.

LOADING TIPS
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal injury.

ceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the
ratings.

● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
covered
by
the
vehicle’s
warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value
specified
in
the
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart found later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified
in the following “Towing Load/Specification”
chart.

LTI0162

The GCWR equals the combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater
than these or using improper towing equipment
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).

Technical and consumer information 9-17

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.

WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving.
Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.
Allow the engine to cool and return to
normal operation. See “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.

WTI0160

Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load within the
maximum tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
to allow for proper tongue load.

ATI1025

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight
(GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue load.
To determine the available towing capacity, use
the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
9Towing Load/Specification9 chart found
later in this section.

● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification9 chart 11,133 lb. (5049 kg).

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity.

● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Towing Load/Specification9 chart - 6,000 lb.
(2721 kg).

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.
Example:

6,000 lb. (2721 kg)
= 575 lb. (260 kg)

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label 6,000 lb. (2721 kg).

GVW
Available for tongue
weight

11,133 lb. (5049 kg)

GCWR

– 5,425 lb. (2460 kg)

GVW

= 5,708 lb. (2588 kg)

Capacity available for
towing

575 lb. (260 kg) Available tongue weight
/ 5,708 lb. (2588 kg)
=

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 5,425 lb. (2460 kg).

GVWR

– 5,425 lb. (2460 kg)

Available capacity
10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight. If the tongue

Technical and consumer information 9-19

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to
obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
10 - 15% tongue weight specification even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.

Trailer frontal area
CAUTION
Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal
area specification may exceed the towing
capacity of the vehicle. This may affect the
towing performance and lead to vehicle
damage.
The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of a
trailer. The frontal area is the total area of the
vehicle and trailer that is affected by air resistance while towing. Do not exceed the maximum
trailer frontal area specification shown in the
9Towing Load/Specification” chart. The frontal
area can be determined by multiplying the width
of the trailer by the height of the trailer. For
example, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tall
has a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
US & CAN
V6

Towing
Capacity*1, *2

6,000 lb.
(2721 kg)

7,000 lb.
(3175 kg)

Tongue Load

600 lb.
(272 kg)

700 lb.
(318 kg)

Gross Combined Weight
Rating

11,133 lb.
(5,049 kg)

12,570 lb.
(5,700 kg)

Maximum trailer
frontal area

60 sq ft (5.52 sq meters)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated
assuming a base vehicle with driver and any
options required to achieve the rating. Additional
passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment
will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
*2: Requires weight distribution hitch.

TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional
trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This
hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of
this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball
that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine
Nissan ball mounts and hitch balls are available
from your NISSAN dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of
your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your
vehicle and trailer. A genuine Nissan trailer hitch
is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make sure
the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle
to help avoid personal injury or property damage
due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road
surfaces or passing trucks.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.

Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
● The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
● The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.

Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.

Weight carrying hitches
A weight carrying or 9dead weight9 ball mount is
one that is designed to carry the whole amount of
tongue weight and gross weight directly on the
ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or
“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball
mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue
weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given
trailer, and need some of the tongue weight
transferred through the frame and pushing down
on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow
vehicle.

Another reason to have a weight distributing ball
mount is to comply with the rating on your receiver. Most receivers have a weight carrying
rating of 5,000 lbs. gross weight, 500 lbs. tongue
weight and a weight distribution rating of 10,000
lbs. gross weight, 1,000 lbs. tongue weight. This
means that without using a weight distributing
ballmount, the receiver is only designed to carry
5,000 lbs.
When hooking up a trailer using a weight distributing hitch, always refer to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.
With the ignition on and the doors closed,
allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes
so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on
the front and rear bumpers at the center of
the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust
the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper
height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of
the reference height measured in step 2. The
rear bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no
higher than the measured reference
height when the trailer is attached. If the
rear bumper is higher than the measured
reference height when loaded, the vehicle
may handle unpredictably which could
cause a loss of vehicle control and cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.

Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.

Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

Class II hitch

CAUTION

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).

Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).
The genuine NISSAN step bumper is considered
a Class III ball mount.

Class IV hitch
Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,545 kg). A
weight distributing hitch should be used to tow
trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV
trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb
(4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum
trailer weights shown in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart earlier in this section.

● Special hitches which include frame reinforcements are required for towing
above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and
hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport
utility vehicles are available at a
NISSAN dealer.
● The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
● To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
● When towing with the hitch ball
mounted to the rear bumper, do not
make sharp turns. The trailer may contact the bumper and cause damage to
the bumper or trailer.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—arosenma X

Tire pressures
● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety
chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch
ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.

Trailer lights

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.

CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it
installed.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips
● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the
trailer tow package are equipped with a 4-pin
trailer harness connector. If your trailer is
equipped with a 7-pin connector, an adapter will
be needed to connect the trailer lights to the
vehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN dealers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retailers.

● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—arosenma X

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:

Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.

If you move the shift selector lever to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.

● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

4. Apply the parking brake.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

indicator light (if so
6. Make sure the
equipped) indicates the transfer case is in
4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If
the
indicator light is flashing, or the
ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission
is in P (Park) (AT) and turn the 4WD switch
to 2WD or 4H. See 9Automatic transmission
park warning light9 in the 9Instruments and
controls9 section and 9Using four wheel
drive9 in the 9Starting and driving9 section.
7. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
● When going down a hill, shift into a lower
gear and use the engine braking effect.
When going up a long grade, downshift the
transmission to a lower gear and reduce
speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. However, for

9-24 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

long steep grades, do not stay in 1st gear
when driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h) or
2nd gear when driving above 58 MPH (93
km/h).
● If the engine coolant rises to an extremely
high temperature when the air conditioner
system is on, turn off the air conditioner.
Coolant heat can be additionally vented by
opening the windows, switching the fan
control to high and setting the temperature
control to the HOT position.
● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
● Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the vehicle
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described earlier in this section.
● Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.

● Downshift the transmission to a lower gear
for engine braking when driving down steep
or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
without applying the brakes.
● To maintain engine braking efficiency and
electrical charging performance, do not use
overdrive.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
● Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
● Do not use cruise control while towing a
trailer.
● Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
● When stopped in traffic for long periods of
time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P
(Park) position.

Technical and consumer information 9-25

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
● When launching a boat, don’t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.

CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
● DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
DAMAGE internal transmission parts
due to lack of transmission lubrication.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

Automatic Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic
transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST
be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive
wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s
recommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.

9-26 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN
vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN
vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

Technical and consumer information 9-27

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.

Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
I/M
test,
check
the
vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then
blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is
9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20
seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9 If the
MIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9 condition, drive the vehicle through the following
pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If
you cannot or do not want to perform the driving
pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
1. Start the engine when the engine coolant
temperature gauge needle points to C. Allow the engine to idle until the gauge needle
points between the C and H (normal operating temperature).
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
pedal completely and keep it released for at
least 10 seconds.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9
minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes.

9-28 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

EVENT DATA RECORDERS
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission selector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position.
9. Turn the engine off.
10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.
If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is acceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine until
step 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;

the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. The EDR data
may be retrieved during routine vehicle servicing
or for special research. It might also be accessed
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, in
response to a request by law enforcement, or as
otherwise required or permitted by law.

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
● Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

Technical and consumer information 9-29

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later contact:
Tweddle Litho Company
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Drive
Strongsville, OH 44149
1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Drive
Strongsville, OH 44149
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely
event, there is some important information you
should know.
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN
collision parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifications – if you want to help it to last and hold its
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your
insurance agent and your repair shop to
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the
end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Nongenuine (imitation) parts may not provide such
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

9-30 Technical and consumer information

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws
that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

Technical and consumer information 9-31

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MEMO

9-32 Technical and consumer information

10 Index
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
A
Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-17
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36, 4-44
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-22
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-32

Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-62
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-56, 4-70
Audio System
CompactFlash (CF) player . . . . . . . . .4-72
Audio system
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67
Audio System
Music Box hard-disk drive audio
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74
Audio system
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
Audio System
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59, 4-67
Audio system
Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-85
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Automatic
Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-29
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-49
Automatic transmission position indicator
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12

Transmission selector lever lock
release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-26
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65, 4-72
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
BluetoothT hands-free phone system . . . .4-104
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-32
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-30
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-21, 8-23
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-15, 4-33
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-13
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83
CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-62
CD player (See audio system) . . . . .4-56, 4-70
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-24
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-14, 1-15, 1-20, 1-22
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-28, 1-35
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-24
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55, 4-60, 4-68
(models with navigation system) . .4-11, 4-27
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-27
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . .4-56, 4-70
CompactFlash (CF) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Control panel buttons
Brightness/contrast button. .4-15, 4-16, 4-33
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-16
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-25
Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Without navigation system. . . . . . . . . .4-2

Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-85
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36, 4-44
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . .1-52
D
Daytime running light system
(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-30
Display controls
(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-16
Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-20
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Drive positioner, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-27
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-11
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-15
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-16
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

10-2

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

F
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch).
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . .
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . .
Window washer fluid . . . . . . .
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . .
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system)
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . .
Fuel recommendation . . . . . .
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G
. . . . . .6-2
. . . . .2-31
. . . . . .6-2
. . . . . .7-4
. . . . .8-13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .9-2
. .8-8
. .8-9
.8-13
.8-14
.9-10
.2-30

. . . . .1-47
. . . . . .1-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .9-2
.5-20
. .2-7
. .9-4
. .9-3
.3-22
.8-23
.8-25

Garage door opener, HomeLinkT Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.2-53
.3-22
. .2-6
. .2-8
. .2-7
. .2-4
. .2-4
. .2-6
. .2-5
. .2-4
. .2-8
. .8-2
.3-21
.2-39

H
Hands-free phone system, BluetoothT
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Head Restraint . . . . . . .
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headphones (See NISSAN mobile
entertainment system) . . . . . . . . .
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . .

. . .4-104
. . . .2-31
. . . . .1-7
. . . . .1-7
. . . .2-27
. . . .2-27
. . . .8-29
. . . .4-91
. . . .2-32
. . . .2-32

Heater
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36, 4-44
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-38, 4-45
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Hill start assist (HSA) system . . . . . . . . .5-35
HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-53
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Hook
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-3, 5-11
Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-26
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-30
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-30
Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Remote keyless entry operation . . . . . .3-12
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

10-3

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyfob battery replacement . . . .
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . .
Keyless entry system
(See remote keyless entry system)
Keys, For Intelligent Key system . .

. . . . . . .3-2
. . . . . .8-26
. . . . . .3-12
. . . . . .3-16
. . . . . . .3-2

L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . . .
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .
Emission control information label . . . .
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . .
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . .
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . .

.9-11
.9-10
.9-11
.9-10
.9-10
. .9-9
.1-55
.1-22
.9-12

Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Light
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-17
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-30
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-13
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-27
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-17
Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-49
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Lights
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-16
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-17
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12
Luggage storage
(see vehicle loading information). . . . . . . .2-42

M
Maintenance
Changing the maintenance
interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-23
Displaying the maintenance notice
reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-24
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Resetting the maintenance interval. .4-8, 4-23
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-23
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-30
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-26
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Music Box hard-disk drive audio system . . .4-74
N
NISSAN mobile entertainment system
(MES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88

10-4

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-3, 5-11
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-114
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . .
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .9-4
. .2-4
. .9-2
.8-10
.8-11
. .8-9
. .8-9
. .9-5
. .9-5
.3-28
.3-28
.5-17
.6-10
.9-30
.9-30

P
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . .
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . .
Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone, BluetoothT hands-free system .

.
.
.
.
.

. .5-17
. .5-30
. .3-24
. .2-52
.4-104

Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-28, 1-35
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-12
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2
Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . . . .1-54
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-25
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . .
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . .

.4-103
. .4-62
. .4-54
. .4-59
. .4-67
. .4-86

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-85
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Rear view monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Rear window wiper and washer switches. . .2-25
Recorders
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9
Remote controller (See NISSAN mobil
e entertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . .3-16
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-28
Resetting the fuel economy. . . . . . . .4-5, 4-21
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-20, 1-28, 1-35
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-28
Screen (See NISSAN mobile entertainment
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4
Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-15

10-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-12
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . .1-54
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-18
Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-16
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-29
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-3, 5-11
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-25
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Shifting
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-18
Side air bag system (See supplemental side air
bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems). . .1-52
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-11

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Steering
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-85
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 2-42
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . .1-55
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-56, 2-17
Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-47
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-55
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-40
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-49
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-31
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-27
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-33

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-3, 5-11
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Tires of 4-wheel drive. . . . . . . . . . . .8-42
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-26
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16

10-6

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Tire pressure display . . . . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-21
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3
Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . .4-6, 4-21
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-24
Towing
2-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
4-wheel drive models. . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-20
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Transceiver
HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-53
Transmission
Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12
Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-16
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Troubleshooting guide
(NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . . .4-131
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
U
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-26
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch.
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .

.
.
.
.

.3-25
. .9-8
.2-33
.5-33

Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-28
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9
Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle
immobilizer system), engine start . .2-23, 3-3, 5-11
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
W
Warning
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-56, 2-17
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-13
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-14
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-15
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-31
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-16
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-17
Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-49
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-55
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-49
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-24
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

10-7

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91
AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline
is not available you may use unleaded regular
gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI
number (Research octane number 91), but you
may notice a decrease in performance.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
● Engine oil with API Certification Mark
● Viscosity SAE 5W-30
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found in
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

QUICK REFERENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

Power steering fluid 8-13
Battery 8-15
Engine coolant 8-8
Window washer fluid 8-14
Heater and air conditioner 4-36, 4-44
Audio system 4-47
Passenger supplemental air bag 1-40
Spare tire 6-2
Rear door lock 9-12
Fuel filler cap 3-22; Fuel recommendations 9-3
Seat belts 1-12
Door locks 3-4
Driver supplemental air bag 1-40
Hood release 3-20
Meters and gauges 2-3
Brake fluid 8-13
Engine oil 8-9

WGS0024

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Pathfinder (pat)
Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)
03/23/07—debbie X

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Author                          : 
Create Date                     : 2007:04:26 12:42:40Z
Keywords                        : nissan;, pathfinder;, suv;, 2008;, owner, manual;, owners, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, vehicle, operation;, vehicle, maintenance
Modify Date                     : 2013:04:23 11:08:04-05:00
Subject                         : Download the 2008 Nissan Pathfinder Owner's Manual at the official Nissan web site. The owner's manual contains operation of vehicle instructions and maintenance guidelines.
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Producer                        : 
Metadata Date                   : 2013:04:23 11:08:04-05:00
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Document ID                     : uuid:3ce20d4a-5e95-4579-9897-faaa0945b76a
Instance ID                     : uuid:cce65d45-bc6e-424c-b573-cb0f6a71eed6
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Title                           : 2008 Pathfinder Owner's Manual
Description                     : Download the 2008 Nissan Pathfinder Owner's Manual at the official Nissan web site. The owner's manual contains operation of vehicle instructions and maintenance guidelines.
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 448

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2008 Pathfinder Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation